hilook – XVRAID XVR-DVR-NVR CCTV DESK

CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide

Hilook DVR User Manual

How to Set up a Hikvision DVR System

Hikvision Hilook Firmware 2022

UPDATING FIRMWARE

FIRMWARE

Guide Of Hikvision Mobile Setup step by step

How to Add the Security System to APP HiLook Sannce

How to create and find the verification code?

SADP tool Hikvision password reset

Password Reset for Hilook Hikvision NVR/DVR/IPCAM NEW

CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide

Hilook DVR User Manual

How to Set up a Hikvision DVR System

Before You Begin

Let’s Get Started

Hikvision NVR Online Guide

Mobile Setup For Remote Access

How To Connect Hikvision Mobile Setup

GUI 3.0

GUI 4.0

Step-1 Open The Quick Menu

Step-2 Login To Open The Main Menu

Step-3 Go To The Main Menu

Step-4 Go To Configuration

Step-4 Select The Network Option

Step-5 Enable The DHCP

Step- 6 Go To The Maintenance

Step- 7 Go To The Maintenance- Network

Step- 8 Got To Main Menu Network Option

Step- 9 Device Is Online Now

Step-1 Download & Install The App

Step-2 Open The App

Step-3 Select The Region

Step-4 The Home Page Will Appear

Step-5 The Menu Page

Step-6 Select The Log In Option

Step-7 Device Log In

Step-8 Adding The Device

Step-9 Scan The QR Code

Step-10 Scan The NVR

Step-11 Adding Completed

Step-12 Monitoring Begins

Conclusion

XVR AiD — Fri, 28 Jul 2023 18:39:42 +0000

CP PLUS XVR complete setup guide, CP Plus has introduced the new and impactful range of DVRs under the Lite Series which has been integrated with the 4K and H.265 encoding technology that provides you with an outstanding at a reasonably pocket-friendly price.

The 4K resolution processors present in this product help in bringing out every little detail in the image.

Along with that, this DVR uses the intuitive shortcut operation menu which lets you control and manage the system remotely as well and can work as edge storage, central storage, backup storage .

Read Next :

Introduction
1. Overview

The Device is an excellent digital monitor product for security industry. The embedded LINUX OS assures the stable operation. The H.264 and G.711 technologies assure the high-quality image and low bit stream. The frame-by-frame play function displays more details for analysis, and provides the functions such as record, playback, and monitor and assures the synchronization for audio and video. The Device also adopts the advanced control technology and great network data transmission capability.

The Device adopts embedded design to achieve high security and reliability. It can work in the local end and, with strong networking capability it can get connected to the professional surveillance software (Smart PSS) to form a security network to show its powerful remote monitoring function.

The Device is applicable to the areas such as bank, telecom, electricity, traffic, intelligent residential district, factory, warehouse, resources, and water conservancy facilities.

1. Functions

NOTE

The functions might be different depending on the software and hardware version of the model you purchased.

Real-time Surveillance

Support VGA port and HDMI port to realize the surveillance through monitors.
Support HDMI, VGA, and TV output at the same time.

IoT Management

Provide specific management module for IoT features including humidity and temperature data reports and alarms linkage.

Sensor Integration

Integrate coaxial cameras with diverse array of sensors such as temperature, humidity and wireless alarm devices.

Storage Management

Special data format to guarantee data security and avoid the risk of modifying data viciously.
Support digital watermark.

Compression Format

Support multiple-channel audio and video signal. An independent hardware decodes the audio and video signal from each channel to maintain video and audio synchronization.

Backup Function

Support backup operation through USB port (such as USB storage disk, portable HDD, and burner).
Client-end user can download the file from local HDD through network to backup.

Record & Playback

Support each channel real-time record independently, and simultaneously support the functions such as search, backward play, network monitor, record search, and download.
Support various playback modes: slow play, fast play, backward play and frame by frame play.
Support time title overlay so that you can view event accurate occurred time.
Support zooming in the selected area in the live view.

Network Operation

Support network remote real-time monitor, remote record search and remote PTZ control.

Alarm Activation

Several relay alarm outputs to realize alarm activation and on-site light control.
The alarm input port and output port have the protection circuit to guarantee the Device safety.

Communication Port

RS485 port can realize alarm input and PTZ control.
RS232 port can connect to keyboard, COM port of PC or the matrix control.
Standard Ethernet port can realize network remote access function.
The dual-network port has the multiple-address, fault tolerance, load balance setup mode.

PTZ Control

Support PTZ decoder through RS485 port.

Intelligent Operation

Support mouse operation function.
Support “copy and paste” function for the same settings.

UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)

Establish mapping connection between LAN and WAN through UPnP protocol.

Camera Self-adaptive

Auto-recognize and work with the PAL or NTSC camera and HD camera.

Getting Started
1. Checking the Components

When you receive the Device, please check against the following checking list. If any of the items are missing or damaged, contact the local retailer or after-sales engineer immediately.

Sequence	Checking items		Requirement
1	Package	Appearance	No obvious damage.
1	Package	Packing materials	No broken or distorted positions that could be caused by hit.
			Not torn up. EQ NOTE
			Do not tear up or throw away the
2	Labels	Labels on the device	labels; otherwise the warranty
2	Labels	Labels on the device	services are not ensured. You need
			to provide the serial number of the
			product when you call the after-sales service.
3	Device	Appearance	No obvious damage.
3	Device	Data cables, power cables, fan cables, mainboard	No connection loose.

1. Installing HDD

Please check if the HDD is already installed in the Device when you first time using the Device.

It is suggested to use the HDD recommended officially. Do not use the PC HDD.

CAUTION

Shut down the device and then unplug the power cable before you open the case to replace the HDD.

1. Remove the screws to
take off the cover.

Fix the screws on the HDD but do not fasten them.

Match the screws with the holes on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) (WITHOUT HDD) to place the HDD.

Turn the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) upside down to see the screws and then
Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.
Put back the cover and
fasten the screws.

fasten them.

2.2.2 E Model

- - 1. Installing Battery

CD NOTE

The battery is only provided with some models.

1. Put the battery cable through the hole.

2. Connect to the cable into the port.

- - 1. Installing HDD

CQ NOTE

Skip step 6 if the battery is not equipped with the model you purchased.

1. Remove the screws to 2.

take off the cover.

Remove the screws to 3.

Put the HDD onto the bracket.

take off the bracket.

4. Match the holes on the

5. Use screws to fix the

bracket with the screw

HDD onto the bracket.

holes on HDD.

(Optional) Put the battery cable through the hole to connect into the cable port.

Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.
Install the bracket back and then fasten the screws.
Put back the cover and fasten the screws.
- 1. MINI 1U and Compact 1U

Remove the screws on the rear panel.
Fix the screws on the
Place the HDD onto

HDD but do not be

the Device.

fastened.

Turn the device to see the back side of it. Aim the screws of the HDD at the holes on the back of the device and fix the screws.
Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.
Put back the cover and fix the screws.
- 1. 1U

Remove the screws on
Fix the screws onto the
Put the HDD into the

the cover.

4. Turn the device to see the back side of it. Aim the screws of the HDD at the

HDD, but do not be Device.

fastened.

5. Use the HDD cable and power cable to connect HDD and mainboard.

6. Put back the cover and fix the screws.

holes on the back of the

device, and then fix the

screws.

3 Installing Device into Rack

CD NOTE

Only 1.5U and 2U Devices support this installation.

To install the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) into Rack, do the following:

Step 1 Check if the in-house temperature is lower than 35°C(95T) and make sure the 15cm (6in.) spacing around the Device for ventilation.

Step 1 Use six screws to fix the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) on each side.

Step 2 Install from the bottom up.

CAUTION

If you want to install more accessories to the rack, take preventive measures to avoid power socket overload.

Step 3 Install more accessories to the rack if needed.

General Details

This chapter introduces various components of the Device, remote control and mouse operations, and typical connection.

1. Front Panel
2. .1 Smart 1U

Figure 3-1

Icon	Name	Function
0	HDD status indicator	The indicator is off when the HDD is running normally. The indicator glows blue when the HDD is in malfunction.
©	Power status indicator	The indicator is off when the power is connected abnormally. The indicator glows blue when the power is connected normally.
	Network status indicator	The indicator is off when the network connection is correct. The indicator glows blue when the network connection is abnormal.

Table 3-1

3.1.2 E Model

	1 I		2	3	1	5	5 7
□ □ □ e	A	□ □	1 □ 1		1 □ 1	1 □ 1	i □ n n d □ □□□ □□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□! □□□□□
□ □ □ □ □ □	©		3 »	!»	■I		□ n n □ □□□□□ ei □□□ ei □□□ □ □□ r ^₁^LJLJA’ i □ ei □ □ • □□ □□□□□ □ □□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □ □□□
□ □ □ □ □ e □ □ e □ □ E □ □ C □ □ □ E □ D □ □ □ □ E □ DDE □ □ □ □ □ □ E	□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ O El □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □		□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □	□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ nr □ □ □ □ c □ □ □ [ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ nr □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □			inn □ nun onn □□□ □ onn n □□□ □ nnn n uu □ □ODD □□□□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ D El □ □ El El □ □ □ □ n □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ei □ □ □□□□□ □□□□□ ei □ ei □ □ nnn □ □□□ □ □ □ □□ El □ □ □ □ □□□ El HDD □ □ El EI □ □ □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ C □ □ □□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □□□ □□□□ □□□□□□□ □□□□□ □□□□□ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ o □ □ inn o □□□ □□□ □□□ □ □□□ □ nnn □ non □ □□ □ □ □ n □ □ □ □ □ □ □ ei □ □ □ □ n □ □ □□□□□ ei □ □ □ □ □□□ □ nnn □ □ ei □ □ □ ei □□□ □ □□□ □ □ □ ei □ □□□ □ □ □ □ nun ei □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ □ nnn e □□□ □ uu □□□□ □□□ □□□ □ □ □ □ □ o o □ □ □ □□non □ □ □ Q □

Figure 3-2

No.	Button/Icon	Function
1	POWER	Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD). The indicator glows blue when the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is turned on.
2	HDD status indicator	The indicator glows blue when the HDD is in malfunction.
3	Network status indicator	The indicator glows blue when the network connection is abnormal.
4,5,6	Battery status indicator	When the battery remains full or no less than sixty percent, the No.4 indicator is on, and the No.5 and No.6 are out. When the battery remains between thirty percent and sixty percent, the No.5 indicator is on and the others are out. When the battery remains between one percent and thirty percent, the No.6 indicator is on and the others are out. When the battery is exhausted, the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is turned off, or there is no battery attached to the DVR (WITHOUT HDD), all the three indicators are out.
7	USB port	Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.

Table 3-2

3.1.3 Compact 1U

Figure 3-3

No.	Port Name	Function
1	HDD	Glows blue when HDD status is abnormal.
2	NET	Glows blue when network status is abnormal.
3	POWER	Glows blue when the power is connected properly.

No.	Port Name	Function
4	USB port	Connects to peripheral devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.

Table 3-3

3.1.4 MINI 1U

Name	Icon	Function
Power button	0	Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down DVR (WITHOUT HDD).
Up Down	A, ▼	Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.
		Increase/decrease numeral.
		Assistant function such as PTZ menu.
Left Right	◄ ►	Shift current activated control,
		When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar..
ESC	ESC	Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.
		When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.
Enter	ENTER	Confirm current operation
		Go to default button
		Go to menu
Assistant	Fn	One-window monitor mode, click this button to display assistant ~~funct~~i~~on: PTZ contro~~l ~~and~~ i~~man~~e color
		Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the
		In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.
		In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.
		Realize other special functions.

USB port		To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.
Network abnormal indication light	Net	Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.
HDD abnormal indication light	HDD	HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.
IR Receiver	IR	It is to receive the signal from the remote control.

3.1.5 1U

Figure 3-5

Name	Icon	Function
Power button	o	Power button, press this button for three seconds to boot up or shut down DVR (WITHOUT HDD).
Up Down	A, ▼	Activate current control, modify setup, and then move up and down.
		Increase/decrease numeral.
		Assistant function such as PTZ menu.
Left Right	◄ ►	Shift current activated control,
		When playback, click these buttons to control playback bar..
ESC	ESC	Go to previous menu, or cancel current operation.
		When playback, click it to restore real-time monitor mode.
Enter	ENTER	Confirm current operation
		Go to default button
		Go to menu
Slow play	h	Multiple slow play speeds or normal playback.
Assistant	Fn	One-window monitor mode, click this button to display ~~ass~~i~~stant funct~~i~~on: pt~~₇ ~~contro~~l ~~and~~ i~~man~~e color
		Backspace function: in numeral control or text control, press it for 1.5seconds to delete the previous character before the

		In motion detection setup, working with Fn and direction keys to realize setup.
		In text mode, click it to switch between numeral, English character(small/capitalized) and etc.
		Realize other special functions.
USB port		To connect USB storage device, USB mouse.
Network abnormal indication	Net	Network error occurs or there is no network connection, the light becomes red to alert you.
HDD abnormal indication l^ht	HDD	HDD error occurs or HDD capacity is below specified threshold value, the light becomes red to alert you.
IR Receiver	IR	It is to receive the signal from the remote control.

Table 3-4

3.2 Rear Panel

3.2.1 Smart 1U

Figure 3-6

No.	Port Name	Function
1	Video input port	Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
2	USB port	Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.
3	VGA port	Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.
4	HDMI port	High definition audio and video signal output port. The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.
5	Network port	Connects to Ethernet port.

No.	Port Name	Function
6	Power input port	Inputs DC 12V power.
7	©	Ground terminal.

Table 3-5

3.2.2 E Model

Figure 3-7

Figure 3-8

No.	Port Name	Function
1	Video input port	Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
2	Audio input port	Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.
3	Audio output port	Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
4	RS485 communication port	Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.
5	HDMI port	High definition audio and video signal output port. The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.
6	VGA port	Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.

No.	Port Name	Function
7, 8	USB port	Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.
9	Network port	Connects to Ethernet port.
10	Power input port	Inputs DC 12V power.
11	Power output port	Outputs DC 12V power.
12	Ground	Ground terminal.

Table 3-6

3.2.3 Compact 1U

Figure 3-9

No.	Port Name	Function
1	Video input port	Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
2	Audio input port	Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.
3	Audio output port	Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
4	HDMI port	High definition audio and video signal output port. The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.
5	Network port	Connects to Ethernet port.
6	RS485 communication port	Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.
7	USB port	Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.
8	VGA port	Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.
9	Power input port	Inputs DC 12V power.
10	Power button	Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).
11	©	Ground terminal.
12	Power cable fastener	Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) in case there is any loss.

Table 3-7

3.2.4 MINI 1 U

Figure 3-10

No.	Port Name	Function
1	Alarm input port 1-16	4 groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types: NO (normal open) and NC (normal close). EQ NOTE When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the alarm input device and the Device have the same ground.
	Alarm output port 1-3 (NO1-NO3; C1-C3)	3 groups of alarm output ports (Group 1: port NO1-C1, Group 2: port NO2-C2, Group 3: port NO3-C3). These ports output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure power supply to the external alarm device. NO: Normal open alarm output port. C: Alarm output public end.
	J_	Ground.
2	Video input port	Connects to analog camera to input video signal.
3	Audio input port	Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone. It corresponds to video input port 1.
4	DB25 port	Connects to the audio splitter taken from the package to convert to audio input port which receives the audio signal from devices such as microphone. It corresponds to video input ports 2-16.
5	Audio output port	Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
6	HDMI port	High definition audio and video signal output port. The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.
7	USB port	Connects to external devices such as USB storage device, keyboard and mouse.
8	Network port	Connects to Ethernet port.

No.	Port Name	Function
9	RS485 communication port	Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.
10	Power input port	Inputs DC 12V power.
11	VGA port	Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.
12	Power button	Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).
13	Power cable fastener	Use a cable tie to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) to prevent loss.
14	©	Ground terminal.

Table 3-8

3.2.5 1U

Figure 3-11

No.	Port Name	Function
1	©	Ground terminal.
2	Alarm input port 1-16	4 groups of alarm input ports (Group 1: port 1 to port 4; Group 2: port 5 to port 8; Group 3: port 9 to port 12; Group 4: port 13 to port 16). These ports receive the signal from the external alarm source. There are two types: NO (normal open) and NC (normal close). Cfl NOTE When your alarm input device is using external power, please make sure the alarm input device and the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) connect to the same ground.
	Alarm output port 1-3 (NO1-NO3; C1-C3)	3 groups of alarm output ports. (Group 1: port NO1- C1,Group 2:port NO2-C2,Group 3:port NO3-C3) ). These ports output alarm signal to the alarm device. Please make sure power supply to the external alarm device. NO : Normal open alarm output port. C : Alarm output public end.
		Ground.
3	Video input port	Connects to analog camera to input video signal.

No.	Port Name	Function
4	Audio input port	Receives audio signal output from the devices such as microphone.
5	Audio output port	Outputs audio signal to the devices such as the sound box.
6	HDMI port	High definition audio and video signal output port. The port outputs the uncompressed high definition video and multi-channel audio data to the connected display with HDMI port.
7	USB port	Connects to the external devices such as keyboard, mouse, and USB storage device.
8	Network port	Connects to Ethernet port.
9	RS485 communication port	Connects to the control devices such as speed dome PTZ. RS485_A port is connected by the cable A and RS485_B is connected to the cable B.
10	Power input port	Inputs DC 12V power.
11	VGA port	Outputs analog video data to the connected display with VGA port.
12	Power button	Turns on/off the DVR (WITHOUT HDD).
13	Power cable fastener	Use clamp to secure the power cable on the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) in case there is any loss.

Table 3-9

1. Remote Control Operations

CQ NOTE

Please note the remote control is not our standard accessory and might not be included in the

accessary bag. It is supplied dependent on the model you purchased.

Figure 3-12

No.	Name	Function
1	Power button	Press this button to boot up or shut down the device.
2	Address	Press this button to input device serial number, so that you can control the Device.
3	Forward	Multi-step forward speed and normal speed playback.
4	Slow motion	Multi-step slow motion speed or normal playback.
5	Next record	In playback state, press this button to play back the next video.
6	Previous record	In playback state, press this button to play back the previous video.
7	Play/Pause	In normal playback state, press this button to pause playback. In pause state, press this button to resume to normal playback. In live view window interface, press this button to enter video search menu.
8	Reverse/pause	In the reverse playback state, press this button to pause reverse playback.
8	Reverse/pause	In the reverse playback pause state, press this button to resume to playback reversing state.
9	Esc.	Go back to previous menu or cancel current operation (close front interface or control).

No.	Name	Function
10	Record	Start or stop record manually. In record interface, use the direction buttons to select the channel that you want to record. Press this button for at least 1.5 seconds, and the manual record interface will be displayed.
11	Direction keys	Switch between current activated controls by going left or right. In playback state, the keys control the playback progress bar. Aux function (such as operating the PTZ menu).
12	Enter/menu key	Confirms an operation. Go to the OK button. Go to the menu.
13	Multiple-window switch	Switch between multiple-window and one-window.
14	Fn	In single-channel monitoring mode, press this button to display the PTZ control and color setting functions. Switch the PTZ control menu in PTZ control interface. In motion detection interface, press this button with direction keys to complete setup. In text mode, press and hold this button to delete the last character. To use the clearing function: Long press this button for 1.5 seconds. In HDD menu, switch HDD recording time and other information (as indicated in the pop-up message.
15	Alphanumeric keys	Input password, numbers. Switch channel. Press Shift to switch the input method.

Table 3-10

1. Mouse Operations

Q3 NOTE

The operations are based on the considerations for right-handed users.

Operation	Function
Click left mouse button	Password input dialogue box pops up if you have not logged in yet. In live view window interface, you can go to the main menu.
	When you have selected one menu item, click it to view menu content.
	Implement the control operation.
	Modify checkbox or motion detection status.
	Click combo box to pop up drop-down list.
	In text box, click the corresponding button on the panel to enter a numeral or English character (small/capitalized).

In English input mode: Click =1 to enter a backspace and click a

Operation

Function

to delete the previous character.

In numeral input mode: Click =1 to clear and click a to delete

the previous character.

Double-click left

mouse button

Right-click

Implement special control operations such as double-click one item in the file list to play back the video.

In multiple-window mode, double-click one channel to view in full-window. Double-click current video again to go back to previous multiple-window mode.

Right-click in live view window interface, the shortcut menu is displayed. For different series product, the shortcut menu may vary.

Exit current menu without saving the modification.

In numeral input box: Increase or decrease numeral value.

Click scroll wheel button

Switch the items in the check box.

Page up or page down.

Point to select and move

Select current control and move it.

Dragging selection with left button

a box

mouse

Select motion detection zone.

Select privacy mask zone.

Table 3-11

Connecting Basics

This chapter introduces various components of the Device, remote control and mouse operations, and typical connection.

Typical Connection Diagram

CD NOTE

The following figure is for reference only. The actual product shall govern.

Figure 4-2

Figure 4-3

1. Connecting to Video and Audio Input and Output
  1. Video Input

The video input interface is BNC. The input video format includes: PAL/NTSC BNC (1.0VP-P, 75Q.).

The video signal should comply with your national standards.

The input video signal shall have high SNR, low distortion; low interference, natural color and suitable lightness.

Guarantee the stability and reliability of the camera signal

The camera shall be installed in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight, inflammable, explosive substances and etc.

The camera and the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) should have the same grounding to ensure the normal operation of the camera.

Guarantee stability and reliability of the transmission line

Please use high quality, sound shielded BNC. Please select suitable BNC model according to the transmission distance.

If the distance is too long, you should use twisted pair cable, and you can add video compensation devices or use optical fiber to ensure video quality.

You should keep the video signal away from the strong electromagnetic interference, especially the high-tension current.

Keep connection lugs in well contact

The signal line and shielded wire should be fixed firmly and in well connection. Avoid dry joint, lap welding and oxidation.

- 1. Video Output

Video output includes a BNC (PAL/NTSC1.0Vp-p, 75Q) output, a VGA output and HDMI output. System supports BNC, VGA and HDMI output at the same time.

When you are using pc-type monitor to replace the monitor, please pay attention to the following points:

To defer aging, do not allow the pc monitor to run for a long time.
Regular demagnetization will keep device maintain proper status.
Keep it away from strong electromagnetic interference devices.

Using TV as video output device is not a reliable substitution method. You also need to reduce the working hour and control the interference from power supply and other devices. The low- quality TV may result in device damage.

- 1. Audio Input

These series Product audio input port adopt BNC port.

Due to high impedance of audio input, please use active sound pick-up.

Audio transmission is like video transmission. Try to avoid interference, dry joint, loose contact and it shall be away from high tension current.

- 1. Audio Output

The audio output signal parameter is usually over 200mv 1KQ (BNC or RCA). It can directly connect to low impedance earphone, active sound box or amplifier-drive audio output device. If the sound box and the pick-up cannot be separated spatially, it is easy to arouse squeaking. In this case you can adopt the following measures:

Use better sound pick-up with better directing property.
Reduce the volume of the sound box.
Using more sound-absorbing materials in decoration can reduce voice echo and improve acoustics environment.
Adjust the layout to reduce happening of the squeaking.
1. Connecting to Alarm Input and Output

Please read the followings before connecting.

Alarm input

Please make sure alarm input mode is grounding alarm input.
Grounding signal is needed for alarm input.
Alarm input needs the low-level voltage signal.
Alarm input mode can be either NC (normal Open) or NO (Normal Close)
When you are connecting two DVR (WITHOUT HDD)s or you are connecting one DVR

(WITHOUT HDD) and one other device, please use a relay to separate them.

Alarm output

The alarm output port should not be connected to high power load directly (It shall be less than 1A) to avoid high current which may result in relay damage. Please use the contactor to realize the connection between the alarm output port and the load.

How to connect PTZ decoder

Ensure the decoder has the same grounding with DVR (WITHOUT HDD), otherwise you may not control the PTZ. Shielded twisted wire is recommended and the shielded layer is used to connect to the grounding.
Avoid high voltage. Ensure proper wiring and some thunder protection measures.
For too long signal wires, 120Q should be parallel connected between A, B lines on the far end to reduce reflection and guarantee the signal quality.
“485 A, B” of DVR (WITHOUT HDD) cannot parallel connect with “485 port” of another

device.

The voltage between of A, B lines of the decoder should be less than 5V.

Please make sure the front-end device has soundly earthed

Improper grounding may result in chip damage.

.3.1 Introducing Alarm Port

CD NOTE

The alarm input ports are dependent on the model you purchased.

I 4 NOT C1 4 NO2 C2 4 NO3 C3 4 NO4 C4 4- NO5 C5 NC5 4- ^C<2V~ T* T- R+ R- |

[BBHMBBBBBBiaiilIRffBBBBBïHïBBRI I 1 2 3 445 6 7 8 4 A B 4 9 10 11 12 4 13 14 15 16 4 4 |

Figure 4-4

Icon Description

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16	ALARM 1 to ALARM 16. The alarm becomes active in low voltage.
NO1 C1, NO2 C2, NO3 C3, NO4 C4	There are four groups of normal open activation output (on/off button).
NO5 C5 NC5,	There is one group of normal open activation output (on/off button).
CTRL 12V	Control power output of the 6^th alarm output channel. Voltage current: 500mA. When there is an alarm output, close the power output. When the alarm is cancelled, open the power output.
+12V	Rated current. Voltage current: 500mA.
	Ground cable.
485 A/B	485 communication port. They are used to control devices such as decoder. 1200 should be parallel connected between A, B lines if there are too many PTZ decoders.
T+,T-,R+,R-	Four-wire full-duplex RS485 port. T+ T-: output wire. R+ R-: input wire.

Table 4-1

.3.2 Alarm Input

Please refer to the following figure for more information.

Grounding alarm inputs which includes Normal open and Normal close type.
Please parallel connect COM end and GND end of the alarm detector (Provide external power to the alarm detector).
Please parallel connect the Ground of the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) and the ground of the alarm detector.
Please connect the NC port of the alarm sensor to the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) alarm input(ALARM)
Use the same ground with that of DVR (WITHOUT HDD) if you use external power to the alarm device.

Figure 4-5

.3.3 Alarm Output
Provide external power to external alarm device.
To avoid overloading, please read the following relay parameters table carefully.
RS485 A/B cable is for the A/B cable of the PTZ decoder.
.3.4 Alarm Output Relay Parameters

CD NOTE

Refer to the actual product for relay model information.

Model		HFD23/005-1ZS	HRB1-S-DC5V
Material of the touch		AgNi+ gold-plating	AuAg10/AgNi10/CuNi30
Rating (Resistance Load)	Rated switch capacity	30V DC 1A/125V AC 0.5A	24V DC 1A/125V AC 2A
	Maximum switch power	62.5VA/30W	250VA/48W
	Maximum switch voltage	125V AC/60V DC	125V AC/60V DC
	Maximum switch currency	2A	2A
Insulation	Between touches	400VAC 1 minute	500VAC 1 minute
Insulation	Between touch and winding	1000VAC 1 minute	1000VAC 1 minute
Turn-on Time		5 ms max	5ms max
Turn-off Time		5 ms max	5ms max
Longevity	Mechanical	1x107times	5×106 times

Model		HFD23/005-1ZS	HRB1-S-DC5V
		(300 times/MIN)	(300 times/MIN)
	Electrical	1*105 times (30 times/MIN)	2.5*104 times (30 times/MIN)
Working Temperature		-30C-+70C	-40C-+70C

1. Connecting to RS485 Port

Step 1 Connect the RS485 cable of the PTZ camera to the RS485 port on the Device. Ensure the match of A and B interfaces.

Step 2 Connect the video out cable of the PTZ camera to the video input port on the Device.

Step 3 Turn on the PTZ camera.

1. Replacing Battery

Please make sure to use the same battery model if possible.

We recommend replace battery regularly (such as one-year) to guarantee system time

accuracy.

CAUTION

Before replacement, please save the system setup, otherwise, you may lose the data completely!

Local Configurations

Please read the following notes prior to using your Device.

CD NOTE

The interfaces in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.
Conventions for mouse operations on a menu.

O Click: On the menu, left-click the mouse once on an option to enter the option setting.

O Right-click: On any interface, right-click the mouse once to return to the previous level. For details about mouse operations, see “3.4 Mouse Operations.”

1. Initial Settings
  1. Booting up

CAUTION

Ensure the input voltage corresponds to the power requirement of the Device. Power on the Device after the power cable is properly connected.
To protect the Device, please connect the Device with the power cable first, and then connect to the power source.
To ensure the stable work of the Device and the external devices connected to the Device and to prolong the batter life, it is recommended to refer to the national related standard to use the power source that provides stable voltage with less interference from ripples. USP power source is recommended.

Step 1 Connect the Device to the monitor.

Step 2 Plug in the power cable to the Device.

Step 3 Press the power button to turn on the Device. The power indicator light is on.

On the connected monitor, the live view screen is displayed by default. If you turn on the Device during the time period that is configured for recording, the system starts recording after it is turned on, and you will see the icon indicating recording status is working in the specific channels.

- 1. Initializing the Device

When booting up for the first time, you need to configure the password information for admin (by default).

ED NOTE

To secure the Device, it is strongly recommended for you to properly keep the password for admin and modify it regularly.

Step 1 Turn on the Device.

The Device Initialization interface is displayed. See Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1

Step 2 Configure the password information for admin. For details, see Table 5-1.

Parameter	Description
User	By default, the user is admin.
Password	In the Password box, enter the password for admin. The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contain at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , “;”,”:” and “&”).
Confirm Password
Prompt Question	In the Prompt Question box, enter the information that can remind you of the password. ED NOTE
	On the login interface, click	Efi	, the prompt will display to help you
		—

	find back the password.

Table 5-1

Step 3 Click Next.

The unlock pattern setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2

Step 4 Draw a unlock pattern.

After the setting is completed, the password protection settings interface is displayed.

See Figure 5-3.

EQ NOTE

The pattern that you want to set must cross at least four points.
If you do not want to configure the unlock pattern, click Skip.
Once you have configured the unlock pattern, the system will require the unlock

pattern as the default login method. If you skip this setting, enter the password for login.

Figure 5-3

Step 5 Configure the protection parameters for password. For details, see Table 5-2.

After configuration, if you forgot the password for admin user, you can reset the password through the reserved email address or security questions. For details about resetting the password, see “5.1.3 Resetting Password.”

If you do not want to configure the settings, disable the email address and security questions functions on the interface.

Password Protection Mode	Description
Email Address	Enter the reserved email address. In the Email Address box, enter an email address for password reset. In case you forgot password, enter the security code that you will get from this reserved email address to reset the password of admin.
Security Questions	Configure the security questions and answers. In case you forgot password, enter the answers to the questions can make you reset the password.
Œ NOTE
If you want to configure the email or security questions fucntion later or you want to
change the configurations, select Main Menu ^ Account ^ USER.

Table 5-2

Step 6 Click Save to complete the settings.

The End-User License Agreement interface is displayed.

Step S Select the I have read and agree to all terms check box.

Step 8 Click Next.

The Startup Wizard interface is displayed. For details about quick settings during startup, see “5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard.”

5.1.3 Resetting Password

You can reset the password through the QR code or the security questions.

To reset through the QR code, make sure the Enable check box is selected in Main Menu ^ System ^ SECURITY > Password Reset.
To reset through the security questions, make sure the security quesitons is configured. Step 1 Enter the login interface.
If you have configured unlock pattern, the unlock pattern login interface is displayed. See Figure 5-4. Click Forgot Pattern, the password login interface is displayed. See Figure 5-5.
If you did not configure unlock pattern, the password login interface is displayed. See Figure 5-5.

CQ NOTE

On the unlock pattern login interface, click Switch User to login; or on the password login interface, in the User Name list, select other users to login.

Figure 5-4

Figure 5-5

Step 2 Click □.

If you did not set the reserved email address, the email entering interface is displayed. See Figure 5-6. Enter the email address, and then click Next, the Reset the password interface is displayed. See Figure 5-7.
If you have set the reserved email address, the Reset the password interface is displayed. See Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-6

Figure 5-7

Step 3 Rest the password.

QR code

Follow the onscreen instructions to get the security code in your reserved email address. In the Security code box, enter the security code.

CAUTION

You are given the limited times to get the security code by scanning the QR code within 24 hours. Please operate carefully.
Please use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.

• Security questions

On the Reset the password interface as shown in Figure 5-6, in the Reset Type list, select Security Questions, the Security Questions interface is displayed, see Figure 5-8.

EQ NOTE

If you did not configure the security questions before, in the Reset Type list, there will be no Security Questions.

In the Answer box, enter the correct answers.

Figure 5-8

Step 4 Click Next.

The new password resetting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-9.

Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

Figure 5-9

In the New Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm Password box.

Click Save. The password resetting is started.

After resetting is completed, a pop-up message is displayed.

Click OK.

A pop-up message is displayed asking if you want to sync the password with the remote devices, see Figure 5-10.

Click Cancel, the resetting is finished.
Click OK, the Sync Info interface is displayed. See Figure 5-10.

Figure 5-10

This message appears only when there are digital channels instead of complete analog channels.

Figure 5-11

5.1.4 Setting Up with the Startup Wizard

- - 1. Entering Startup Wizard

The Startup Wizard helps you configure the basic settings to set up the Device.

After you have initialized the Device, the Startup Wizard interface is displayed. See Figure 512.

Figure 5-12

CD NOTE

If you select the Auto-check for updates check box, the system will notify you automatically when updates are available.

- - 1. Configuring General Settings

You can configure the general settings for the Device such as Device name, language, and settings for instant playback.

You can also configure general settings by selecting Main Menu ■+ System ■+ General ^ General.

Step 1 On the Startup Wizard interface, click Next.

The General interface is displayed. See Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13

Step 2 Configure the general settings parameters. See Table 5-3.

Parameter	Description
Device Name	In the Device Name box, enter the Device name.
Device No.	In the Device No. box, enter a number for the Device.
Language	In the Language list, select a language for the Device system.
Video Standard	In the Video Standard list, select PAL or NTSC according to your actual situation.
Instant Play (Min.)	In the Instant Play box, enter the time length for playing back the recoded video. The value ranges from 5 to 60. On the live view control bar, click the instant playback button to play back the recorded video within the configured time.
Auto Logout (Min.)	In the Auto Logout box, enter the standby time for the Device. The Device automatically logs out when it is not working for the configured time period. You need to login the Device again. The value ranges from 0 to 60. 0 indicates there is not standby time for the Device. Click Monitor Channel(s) when logout. You can select the channels that you want to continue monitoring when you logged out.
Navigation Bar	Enable the navigation bar. When you click on the live view screen, the navigation bar is displayed.
Mouse Sensitivity	Adjust the speed of double-click by moving the slider. The bigger the value is, the faster the double-clicking speed must be.

Table 5-3

- - 1. Configuring Date and Time Settings

You can configure the system time, choose the time zone, set the daylight saving time, and enable the NTP server.

You can also configure date and time settings by selecting Main Menu ^ System ■+ General ^ Date &Time.

Step 1 After you have configured the general settings, on the General interface, click Next

The Date & Time interface is displayed. See Figure 5-14.

Figure 5-14

Step 2 Configure the settings for date and time parameters. See Table 5-4.

Parameter	Description
System Time	In the System Time box, enter time for the system. Click the time zone list, you can select a time zone for the system, and the time in adjust automatically. /K CAUTION Do not change the system time randomly; otherwise the recorded video cannot be searched. It is recommended to avoid the recoding period or stop recording first before you change the system time.
Date Format	In the Date Format list, select a date format for the system.
Date Separator	In the Date Separator list, select a separator style for the date.
Time Format	In the Time Format list, select 12-HOUR or 24-HOUR for the time display style.
DST	Enable the Daylight-Saving Time function. Click Week or click Date.
Start Time	Configure the start time and end time for the DST.
End Time	Configure the start time and end time for the DST.

Parameter	Description
NTP	Enable the NTP function to sync the Device time with the NTP server.
Server	In the Server box, enter the IP address or domain name of the corresponding NTP server. Click Manual Update, the Device starts syncing with the server immediately.
Port	The system supports TCP protocol only and the default setting is 123.
Interval (Min.)	In the Interval box, enter the amount of time that you want the Device to sync time with the NTP server. The value ranges from 0 to 65535.

Table 5-4

- - 1. Configuring Network Settings

You can configure the basic network settings such as net mode, IP version, and IP address of the Device.

You can also configure network settings by selecting Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP.

Step 1 After you have configured the date and time settings, on the Date&Time interface, click Next.

The NETWORK interface is displayed. See Figure 5-15.

Figure 5-15

Step 2 Configure the settings for network parameters. See 0.

Parameter	Description
Net Mode		Multi-address: Two Ethernet ports work separately through either of which you can request the Device to provide the services such as HTTP and RTSP. You need to configure a default Ethernet port (usually the Ethernet port 1 by default) to request the services from the device end such as DHCP, Email and FTP. If one of the

	two Ethernet ports is disconnected as detected by networking testing, the system network status is regarded as offline. Fault Tolerance: Two Ethernet ports share one IP address. Normally only one Ethernet port is working and when this port fails, the other port will start working automatically to ensure the network connection. When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN. Load Balance: Two network cards share one IP address and they are working at the same time to share the network load averagely. If one of them fails, the other can continue working normally. When testing the network status, the network is regarded as offline only when both of the two Ethernet ports are disconnected. The two Ethernet ports are used under the same LAN. CQ NOTE The Device with single Ethernet port does not support this function.
Default Ethernet Port	In the Ethernet Card list, select an Ethernet port as a default port. This setting is available only when the Multi-address is selected in the Net Mode list.
IP Version	In the IP Version list, you can select IPv4 or IPv6. Both versions are supported for access.
MAC Address	Displays the MAC address of the Device.
DHCP	Enable the DHCP function. The IP address, subnet mask and default gateway are not available for configuration once DHCP is enabled. If DHCP is effective, the obtained information will display in the IP Address box, Subnet Mask box and Default Gateway box. If not, all values show 0.0.0.0. If you want manually to configure the IP information, disable the DHCP function first. If PPPoE connection is successful, the IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and DHCP are not available for configuration.
IP Address	Enter the IP address and configure the corresponding subnet mask and default gateway. CQ NOTE IP address and default gateway must be in the same network segment.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS DHCP	Enable the DHCP function to get the DNS address from router.
Preferred DNS	In the Preferred DNS box, enter the IP address of DNS.
Alternate DNS	In the Alternate DNS box, enter the IP address of alternate DNS.
MTU	In the MTU box, enter a value for network card. The value ranges from 1280 byte through 1500 byte. The default is 1500.

Parameter	Description
	CQ NOTE
	• Modifying MTU value will cause network interruption and restart,
	which interrupt the network service. There is a pop-up message to
	let you confirm if you want to save the modification, if yes, the
	modification takes effect.
	• Suggested MTU values are as below.
	O 1500: The biggest value of Ethernet information package.
	This value is typically selected if there is no PPPoE or VPN
	connection, and it is also the default value of some routers,
	network adapters and switches.
	O 1492: Optimized value for PPPoE.
	O 1468: Optimized value for DHCP. O 1450: Optimized value for VPN.
Test	Click Test to test if the entered IP address and gateway are interworking.

Table 5-5

- - 1. Configuring InstaOn Settings

You can add the Device into your cell phone client or the platform to manage.

You can also configure InstaOn function by selecting Main Menu ^ Network ■+ InstaOn Cloud.

NOTE

Make sure the DVR (WITHOUT HDD) is connected into the Internet, and if yes, in the Status box of the InstaOn interface, it shows Online.

Step 1 After you have configured the network settings, on the NETWORK interface, click Next.

The InstaOn Cloud interface is displayed. See Figure 5-16.

Figure 5-16

Step 2 Enable the InstaOn function.

Step 3 Click Apply.

You can start adding the device.

Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device.
Platform: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the InstaOn management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, please refer to the InstaOn operation manual.

ED NOTE

You can also enter the QR code of Cell Phone Client and Device SN by clicking
on the top right of the interfaces after you have entered the Main Menu.

To use this function, take adding device into Cell Phone Client as an example.

Adding Device into Cell Phone Client

Step 1 Use your cell phone to scan the QR code under Cell Phone Client to download the application.

Step 2 On your cell phone, open the application, and then tap .

The menu is displayed. You can start adding the device.

Tap Device Manager.

The Device Manager interface is displayed. See Figure 5-17.

Figure 5-17

Tap on the top right corner.

The interface requiring device initialization is displayed. A pop-up message reminding you to make sure the Device is initialized is displayed.

Tap OK.

O If the Device has not been initialized, Tap Device Initialization to perform initializing by following the onscreen instructions.

O If the Device has been initialized, you can start adding it directly.

Tap Add Device.

The Add Device interface is displayed. See Figure 5-18.

LJ NOTE

You can add wireless device or wired device. The Manual takes adding wired device as an example.

Figure 5-18

5) Tap InstaOn.

The InstaOn interface is displayed. See Figure 5-19.

..■Il E 10:39 O 41%

(V) Scan QR Code

Figure 5-19

Enter a name for the DVR (WITHOUT HDD), the username and password, scan the QR code under Device SN.
Tap Start Live Preview.

The Device is added and displayed on the live view interface of the cell phone.

See Figure 5-20.

Figure 5-20

- - 1. Configuring Encode Settings

You can configure the settings of main stream and sub stream for the Device.

You can also configure encode settings by selecting Main Menu ^ Camera ■+ Encode ^ Encode.

Step 1 After you have configured the InstaOn settings, on the InstaOn interface, click Next. The Encode interface is displayed. See Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21

Step 2 Configure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters. See Table 5-6.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.
Smart Codec	Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage space.
Type	Main Stream: In the Type list, select General, MD (Motion Detect), or Alarm. Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.
Compression	In the Compression list, select the encode mode. H.265: Main profile encoding. H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high definition. This setting is recommended. H.264: Main profile encoding. H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher bit stream compared with other settings for the same definition.
Resolution	In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video. The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your device model.
Frame Rate (FPS)	Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes along with the resolution. Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30.

	However, the actual range of frame rate that you can select depends on the capability of the Device.
Bit Rate Type	In the Bit Rate Type list, select CBR (Constant Bit Rate) or VBR (Variable Bit Rate). If you select CBR, the image quality cannot be configured; if you select VBR, the image quality can be configured.
Quality	This function is available if you select VBR in the Bit Rate List. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
I Frame Interval	The interval between two reference frames.
Bit Rate (Kb/S)	In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
Video	Enable the function for sub stream.
Audio Encode	Click More Setting, the More Setting interface is displayed. Audio Encode: This function is enabled by default for main stream. You need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled, the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream. Audio Source: In the Audio Source list, you can select LOCAL and HDCVI. O LOCAL: The audio signal is input from Audio In port. O HDCVI: The audio signal is input from HDCVI camera. Audio Format: In the Audio Format list, select a format that you need.
Audio Source
Audio Format

Table 5-6

- - 1. Configuring Snapshot Settings

You can configure the basic snapshot settings such as quantity of snapshot each time, channel(s) to take snapshot, and image size and quality of snapshot.

You can also configure general settings by selecting Main Menu ■> Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot.

For more information about snapshot settings, see “5.8 Configuring Snapshot Settings.”

Step 1 After you have configured the encode settings, on the Encode interface, click Next.

The SNAPSHOT interface is displayed. See Figure 5-22.

Figure 5-22

Step 2 Configure the settings for the snapshot parameters. See Table 5-7.

Parameter	Description
Manual Snap	In the Manual Snap list, select how many snapshots you want to take each time.
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.
Mode	In the Mode list, select type of snapshots.
Image Size	In the Image Size list, select a value for the image.
Image Quality	Configure the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level, the better the image will become.
Interval	Configure or customize the snapshot frequency.

Table 5-7

- - 1. Configuring Basic Storage Settings

You can configure the settings for the situations when HDD is full, file length and time length of recorded video, and the settings if to auto-delete the old files.

You can also configure basic storage settings by selecting Main Menu ^ Storage ^ BASIC.

Step 1 After you have configured the encode settings, on the SNAPSHOT interface, click Next.

The BASIC interface is displayed. See Figure 5-23.

Figure 5-23

Step 2 Configure the basic storage settings parameters. See Table 5-8.

Parameter	Description
HDD Full	Configure the settings for the situation when all the read/write discs are full, and there is no more free disc. Select Stop Record to stop recording Select Overwrite to overwrite the recorded video files always from the earliest time.
Pack Mode	Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.
Auto-Delete Old Files	Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, in the AutoDelete Old Files list, select Customized to configure the time length for how long you want to keep the old files.

Table 5-8

- - 1. Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule

You can configure the schedule for the recorded video such as channels to record, alarm settings, and the armed period.

You can also configure recorded video storage settings by selecting Main Menu ■+ Storage ■+ Schedule ^ Record.

Step 1 After you have configured the basic storage settings, on the BASIC interface, click Next.

The Record interface is displayed. See Figure 5-24.

Figure 5-24

Step 2 Configure the record settings parameters. See Table 5-9.

Parameter Channel	In the Channel list, select a channel to record the video.
Pre-record	In the Pre-record list, enter the amount of time that you want to start the recording in advance.
Redundancy	If there are several HDDs installed to the Device, you can set one of the HDDs as the redundant HDD to save the recorded files into different HDDs. In case one of the HDDs is damaged, you can find the backup in the other HDD. Select Main Menu ^ Storage ^ HDD MANAGER, and then set a HDD as redundant HDD. Select Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Record, and then select the Redundancy check box. O If the selected channel is not recording, the redundancy function takes effect next time you record no matter you select the check box or not. O If the selected channel is recording, the current recorded files will be packed, and then start recording according to the new schedule. CD NOTE Not all models support this function. The redundant HDD only back up the recorded videos but not snapshots.
Event type	Select the check box of the event type which includes General, MD (motion detect, video loss, tempering, diagnosis), Alarm (IoT alarms, local alarms, alarms from alarm box, IPC external alarms, IPC Offline alarms), MD & Alarm, Intel (IVS events, face detection), and POS.
Period	Define a period during which the configured recording setting is active.

Parameter

Description

EO NOTE

The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.

Copy

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

Table 5-9

Step 3 Define the video recording period by drawing or editing. By default, it is active all the time.

• Define the period by drawing.

Select the check box of event type. See Figure 5-25.

B General

■ MD

| Alarm

MD&Alarm ■ Intel

■ 90S

Figure 5-25

Define a period. The system supports maximum six periods.

Define for the whole week: Click H next to All, all the icon switches to □

you can define the period for all the days simultaneously.

Define for several days of a week: Click H before each day one by one, the

icon switches to S. You can define the period for the selected days

simultaneously.

On the timeline, drag to define a period. The Device starts recoding the selected
event type in the defined period. See Figure 5-26.

Figure 5-26

The color bar indicates the event type that is effective in a defined period:

CQ NOTE

Recording priority in case of event types are overlapped: MD&Alarm •+ Alarm ^ Intel ^ MD ^ General.

•

Select the check box of event type, and then click

to clear the defined

period.

When selecting MD&Alarm, the respective check box of MD and Alarm will be cleared.

• Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.

Click

The Period interface is displayed. See Figure 5-27.

Figure 5-27

Enter the time frame for the period and select the event check box.

O There are six periods for you to set for each day.

O Under Copy, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.

Click Apply to save the settings.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

EQ NOTE

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.
After configuring the recording schedule settings, you need to perform the following operations to start recording according to the defined schedule. O Enable the alarm event and cofigure the settings for the recording channel.

For details, see “5.10 Alarm Events Settings.”

O You need to enable the recording function, see “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.”

5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule

You can configure the storage schedule for the snapshot such as channels to take snapshot, alarm settings, and the armed period.

You can also configure snapshot storage settings by selecting Main Menu ^ Storage ■+

Schedule ^ Snapshot.

Step 1 After you have configured the video recording settings, on the Record interface, click Next.

The SNAPSHOT interface is displayed. See Figure 5-28.

Snapshot
Channel 1
o Alt	Q General		■ MD	■ Alarm	MD&Alarm		■ Intel
	0	2 4	6 8	10 12 14	16 18	20	22 24
o Sunday								a
□ Monday								a
o Tuesday								«
□ Wednes…								a
o Thursday								o
o Friday								a
o Saturday								a

Default

Copy

Back Finished Back

Figure 5-28

Step 2 Configure the snapshot settings parameters. See Table 5-10.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select a channel to take a snapshot.
Event type	Select the check box of the event type which includes General, MD, Alarm, MD&Alarm, Intel, and POS.
Period	Define a period during which the configured snapshot setting is active. For details about defining a period, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule.“
Copy	Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

Table 5-10

Step 3 Click Finished.

A pop-up message is displayed.

Step 4 Click OK.

The live view screen is displayed. The setting up with startup wizard is completed. You can start using the Device.

5.2 Live View

After you logged in the Device, the live view is displayed. See Figure 5-29. The number of channels displayed depends on your model.

To enter the live view screen from other interfaces, click

on the top right of the screen.

Figure 5-29

- 1. Live View Screen

You can view the live video from the connected cameras through each channel on the screen.

By default, the system time, channel name and channel number are displayed on each channel window. This setting can be configured by selecting Main Menu > Camera > OVERLAY.
The figure in the bottom right corner represents channel number. If the channel position is changed or the channel name is modified, you can recognize the channel number by this figure and then perform the operations such as record query and playback.

For the icons displayed on each channel, see Table 5-11.

Icon	Function
■1	Indicates recording status. This icon displays when the video is being recorded.
	This icon displays when the motion detection occurs in the scene.
?	This icon displays when the video loss is detected.
a	This icon displays when the channel monitoring is locked.

Table 5-11

TIPS

To switch the position of two channels, point to one of the two channels, and then drag the window to the other channel.

- 1. Live View Control bar

The live view control bar provides you access to perform the operations such as playback, zoom, real-time backup, manual snapshot, voice talk, adding remote devices, and streams switch.

When you move the pointer to the top middle position of a channel window, the live view control bar is displayed. See Figure 5-30 for analog channel and Figure 5-31 for digital channel.

NOTE

If there is not operation for six seconds after the control bar is displayed, the control bar hides automatically.

Figure 5-30

Figure 5-31

No.	Function	No.	Function	No.	Function
1	Instant Play	4	Manual Snap	7	Add IP Camera
2	Digital Zoom	5	Mute
3	Real-time Backup	6	Audio Talk

5.2.2.1 Instant Playback

You can play back the previous five minutes to sixty minutes of the recorded video.

By clicking □, the instant playback interface is displayed. The instant playback has the

following features:

Move the slider to choose the time you want to start playing.
Play, pause and close playback.
The information such as channel name and recording status icon are shielded during instant playback and will not display until exited.
During playback, screen split layout switch is not allowed.
To change the playback time, select Main Menu ^ System > GENERAL, in the Instant Play box, enter the time you want to play back. See Figure 5-32.

Figure 5-32

5.2.2.2 Digital Zoom

You can enlarge a specific area of the image to view the details by either of the following two ways.

Click Ltl, the icon switches to ^3. Hold down the left mouse button to select the area

you want to enlarge. The area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released.

Point to the center that you want to enlarge, rotate the wheel button to enlarge the area.

NOTE

For some models, when the image is enlarged in the first way described previously, the selected area is zoomed proportionally according to the window.
When the image is in the enlarged status, you can drag the image toward any direction to view the other enlarged areas.

•

Right-click on the enlarged image to return the original status.

- - 1. Real-time Backup

You can record the video of any channel and save the clip into a USB storage device.

By clicking , the recording is started. To stop recording, click this icon again. The clip is

automatically saved into the connected USB storage device.

- - 1. Manual Snapshot

You can take one to five snapshots of the video and save into a USB storage device.

By clicking you can take snapshots. The snapshots are automatically saved into the

connected USB storage device. You can view the snapshots on your PC.

NOTE

To change the quantity of snapshots, select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot, in the Manual Snap list, select the snapshot quantity.

- - 1. Mute (Analog channel only)

You can mute the video sound by clicking

. This function is supported in single-channel

view.

- - 1. Bidirectional Talk (Digital channel only)

You can perform the voice interaction between the Device and the remote device to improve
efficiency of emergency. This function is supported only when the remotely connected IPC
device supports bidirectional talk.

, the icon switches to ^3, the bidirectional talk of the remote device is turned

on. The bidirectional talk of other digital channels is disabled.

• Click □ to cancel the bidirectional talk. The bidirectional talk of other digital channels is resumed.

• Click

- - 1. Remote Devices (Digital channel only)

You can view the information of remote devices and add new remote devices to replace the current connected devices.

By clicking LJ, the Camera Registration interface is displayed. For details about adding the

remote devices, see “5.6 Configuring Remote Devices.”

5.2.3 Navigation Bar

You can access the functions to perform operations through the function icons on the navigation bar. For example, you can access Main Menu and switch window split mode. See Figure 5-33. CD NOTE

The navigation bar is disabled by default. It does not appear in the live view screen until it is enabled. To enable it, select Main Menu ^ System ^ General, enable the Navigation Bar, and then click Apply.

Figure 5-33

Icon		Function
□		Open Main Menu.
0		Expand or condense the navigation bar.
i_uuia»		Select view layout.
		Go to the previous screen.
IE]		Go to the next screen.
		Enable tour function. The icon switches to ^^3.
□		Open the PTZ control panel. For details, see “5.4 Controlling PTZ Cameras.“
		Open the Color Setting interface. For details, see “5.2.5 Color Setting.” CD NOTE
		This function is supported only in single-channel layout.
		Open the record search interface. For detail, see “5.9 Playing Back Video.“
H		Open the EVENT interface to view the device alarm status. For details, see “5.19.3 Viewing Event Information.“
E3		Open the CHANNEL INFO interface to display the information of each channel.
		Open the CAMERA REGISTRATION interface. For details, see “5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices.“
		Open the NETWORK interface. For details, see “5.14.1 Configuring Network Settings.“
o		Open the HDD MANAGER interface. For details, see “5.17.3 Configuring HDD Manager.“

Icon		Function
		Open the USB MANAGER interface. For details about USB operations, see “5.13.2 Backing up Files”, “5.19.2 Viewing Log Information”, “5.18.5 Exporting and Importing System Settings”, “5.18.7 Upgrading the Device.“

Table 5-12

5.2.4 Shortcut Menu

You can quickly access some function interfaces such as main menu, record search, PTZ setting, color setting and select the view split mode.

Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. See Figure 5-34. For details about the functions of shortcut menu, see Table 5-13.

CD NOTE

After you access any interface through shortcut menu, you can return to the previous screen by right-clicking on the current screen.

Main Menu

Q Search

W PTZ

■ View 1 ►

S View 4 »

■- View 8 ►

S View 9 ►

Si View 16 : Previous Screen : Next Screen

S Manual ►

Preview Mode »

S Color Setting

a Image

Figure 5-34

Function	Description
Main Menu	Open Main Menu interface.
Search	Open the Playback interface where you can search and play back record files.
PTZ	Open the PTZ interface.
View Layout	Configure the live view screen as a single-channel layout or multichannel layout.
Previous Screen	Click Previous Screen to go to the previous screen. For example, if you are using 4-split mode, the first screen is displaying the channel 1-4, click Next screen, you can view channel 5-8.
Next Screen
Camera Registration	Open the CAMERA REGISTRATION interface. For details, see “5.6 Configuring Remote Devices

Function	Description
	Adding Remote Devices.“
Manual	Select Record, you can configure the recording mode as Auto or Manual, or stop the recording. You can also enable or disable snapshot function Select Alarm Out, you can configure alarm output settings.
Preview Mode	Select General, the layout of live view screen is as default. Select Show Face List, the detected face snapshots are displayed in the bottom of the live view screen.
Auto Focus	Point to the channel window and right-click on it to open the shortcut menu, and then click Auto Focus. Cfl NOTE
	Not all cameras support this function.
Color Setting	Open the COLOR interface where you can adjust the video image color.
Image	Click to modify the camera properties.

Table 5-13

- 1. Color Setting

You can adjust the video image color effect such as sharpness, brightness, and contrast. The parameters are different according to the connected camera type. Take analog channel as an example.

In the live view screen, right-click on the analog channel to see the shortcut menu, and then select Color Setting, the COLOR interface is displayed. See Figure 5-35.

For details, see “5.5.1 Configuring Image Settings.”

Figure 5-35

Parameter	Description
Period	Divide 24 hours into two periods and configure the corresponding color settings.
Effective Time	Enable the function and then set the effective time for each period.
Sharpness	Adjust the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater. The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.
Hue	Adjust the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50.
Brightness	Adjust the image brightness. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. You can adjust this value when the image as a whole looks dark or bright. However, the image is likely to become dim if the value is too big. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Contrast	Adjust the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. You can adjust this value when the contrast is not obvious. However, if the value is too big, the dark area is likely to become darker and the light area over exposed. If the value is too small, the image is likely to become dim. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Saturation	Adjust the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will become. This value does not influence the general image lightness. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Color Mode	In the Color Mode list, you can select Standard, Soft, Bright, Colorful, Bank, Customized 1, Customized 2, Customized 3, and Customized 4. The sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast and saturation will adjust automatically according to the selected color mode.
EQ	Enhance the image effect. Adjust the effect value. Click ^3, image is adjusted to the optimized effect automatically. • Click ^3, the current effect setting will be locked. EO NOTE
	Only HD analog channel supports this function.

Position	Adjust the display position of the image in the channel window. The value indicates pixel. The default value is 16. CO NOTE
	This function is only supported by analog channel.

Parameter

Description

Customized

You can customize four color modes.

Click Customized. The Customized Color interface is

displayed.

In the Color Mode list, select Customized 1, for example.

Then configure the settings for sharpness, hue, brightness, contrast and saturation. If you select All, the configuration will apply to all four customized color modes.

Click OK.
On the COLOR interface, in the Color Mode list, you can

select the customized color mode.

Table 5-14

- 1. Live View Display

- - 1. Configuring Display Settings

You can configure the display effect such as displaying time title and channel title, adjusting image transparency, and selecting the resolution.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Display ■+ Display.

The DISPLAY interface is displayed.See Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-36

Step 2 Configure the settings for the display parameters. See Table 5-15.

Parameter		Description
Main Screen	Out Port	Indicates the main screen port.
	Time Title	Select the Time Title check box, the current system time displays in each channel window in live view screen. To hide the time, clear the check box.
	Channel Title	Select the Channel Title check box, the channel name, channel number and recording status display in each channel window in live view screen. To hide the time, clear the check box.
	Original Rate	Select the Original Rate check box, the video image displays in its actual size in the channel window.
	IVS Rule Preview	Select the IVS Rule Preview check box to enable IVS rule preview function.
	Transparency	Configure the transparency of the graphical user interface (GUI). The higher the value, the more transparent the GUI becomes.
	Resolution	Select resolution for the video. The default resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is 1280×1024. OJ NOTE
		Some of the resolution options might not be supported on the
		HDMI port.
	Preview Mode	General: No information is displayed on the channel window. Show Face List: Displays the detected face snapshots taken as a result of face detection on the bottom of the live view screen. CQ NOTE
		Not all models support this function.

Parameter

Description

	Enable	Enable extra screen function. After this function is enabled, you can select which port as extra screen port, and the other port automatically becomes the main screen port.
Extra Screen	Out Port	Select the VGA port or HDMI port as the port connected by a secondary monitor. For example, if you select HDMI port as the extra screen port, the VGA port automatically becomes the main screen port.
	Resolution	Select resolution for the video. The default resolution for VGA port and HDMI port is 1280×720. CD NOTE
		Some of the resolution options might not be supported on the
		HDMI port.

CD NOTE

• The main menu does not display on the extra screen.

• If you do not enable the extra screen function, both the VGA port and HDMI port

display the same image.

Table 5-15

- - 1. Configuring Viewing Layout

You can configure the view layout in the live view screen.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Display ^ VIEW.

The View Setting interface is displayed.See Figure 5-37.

Figure 5-37

Step 2 Configure the view layout by clicking the layout buttons on the bottom. See Figure 538.

Figure 5-38

For example, click and select 9-16, the view layout changes immediately,

see

Figure 5-39.

DISPLAY

VIEW

TOUR

ZERO-CHANNEL

• A S (!)

Display / DISPLAY / VIEW

Apply Back

Figure 5-39

Step 3 Adjust the position of channels if needed.

In the channel list, for example, in the channel 9 list, you can select 10, and then the channel 9 and channel 10 exchange positions.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

The live view screen displays the same layout as configured in this section.

- - 1. Configuring Zero-Channel Settings

You can view several video sources on one channel on the web end.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Display ■> Zero-Channel.

The ZERO-CHANNEL interface is displayed.See Figure 5-40.

Figure 5-40

Step 2 Configure the settings for the zero-channel parameters. See Table 5-16.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable zero-channel function.
Compression	In the Compression list, select the video compression standard according to the device capability. The default is H.264.
Resolution	In the Resolution list, select the video resolution. The default is 704×576 (D1).
Frame Rate (FPS)	Select a value between 1 and 25 for PAL standard, and between 1 and 30 for NTSC standard. The actual arrange is decided and selected dependent on the Device capability.
Bit Rate (Kb/S)	The default value is 1024Kb/S. The actual arrange is decided and selected dependent on the Device capability and frame rate.

Table 5-16

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

In the live interface on the web, click

to select one of the

multi-channel modes, and then you can view the local video image.

- - 1. Configuring TV

Œ NOTE

Not all models support this function.

You can adjust the border margins in top, bottom, left and right directions as well as the brightness of the monitor connected to the Video out port of the Device.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Display ^ Tv Adjust.

The TV ADJUST interface is displayed.See Figure 5-41.

DISPLAY	Tûp Mai yin	-Ö		+ 0
VIEW	Rcltcwn Margin	-o		+ Û
KHJR	Leit Mai jo	-o		+ 0
ZERO-CHANHEL	FùgFl Mai pn	-o		+ 0
TV ADJUST	Brightness		o	+ 12«

OeiMlt OK Bad.

Figure 5-41

Step 2 Configure the parameters according to your actual situation.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- 1. Configuring Tour Settings

You can configure a tour of selected channels to repeat playing videos. The videos display in turn according to the channel group configured in tour settings. The system is playing one channel group for a certain period and then automatically changes to the next channel group.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Display ^ TOUR.

The TOUR interface is displayed. There are MainScreen tab and ExtraScreen tab, see Figure 5-42 and Figure 5-43.

DISPLAY			Display >	‘ DISPLAY /	‘ TOUR
DISPLAY	Main Screen
VIEW	Enable	!■
	Interval(Sec)	5
TOUR
	Video Detect	View 1
ZERO-CHANNEL	Alarm	Viewl
	Window Split	Viewl

Add Modify Delete Move up Move down

Default

Apply Back

Figure 5-42

V DISPLAY

CtSFLAV	Mùiî Szceri	EKii’j Soma
YEW	En-sWe	■_
1C4JR	Itïï-vAÎSm. j	5
ffiAOrCMWfflÊL
ffiAOrCMWfflÊL	Lfrrta Efdii
77Âri.ii.F$,T	Lfrrta Efdii
77Âri.ii.F$,T	IB J		C-A-nd i”r>xi2

a j a

3 2

4 ■/ 4

u j a

B J S

TO J TO

Md Krikty lifte to Mow up «uwiiwffl

Figure 5-43

Step 2 Configure the settings for the tour parameters for both Main Screen and Extra Screen.

See Table 5-17.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable tour function.
Interval (Sec.)	Enter the amount of time that you want each channel group displays on the screen. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 120 seconds, and the default value is 5 seconds.
Video Detect, Alarm	Select the View 1 or View 8 for Motion Detect tour and Alarm Tour (system alarm events).
Window Split	In the Window Split list, select View 1, View 4, View 8, or other modes that are supported by the Device.
Channel Group	Display all channel groups under the current Window Split setting. Add a channel group: Click Add, in the pop-up Add Group channel, select the channels to form a group, and then click Save. Delete a channel group: Select the check box of any channel group, and then click Delete. Edit a channel group: Select the check box of any channel group and then click Modify, or double-click on the group. The Modify Channel Group dialog box is displayed. You can regroup the channels. Click Move up or Move down to adjust the position of channel group.

Table 5-17

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings. TIPS

•

On the top right of the live view screen, use the left mouse button or press Shift

to switch between (image switching is allowed) and ‘•=?> (image switching is

not allowed) to turn on/off the tour function.

On the navigation bar, click

to enable the tour and click

to disable

it.

Adding a Channel Group

Step 1 Click Add.

The Add Group interface is displayed. See Figure 5-44.

Figure 5-44

Step 2 Select the channels that you want to group for tour. See Figure 5-45.

EQ NOTE

If you want to select more than one channel, in the Window Split list, do not select View 1.

Figure 5-45

Step 3 Click OK to complete the settings.

Modifying a Channel Group

Double-click on a channel group, the Modify Channel Group interface is displayed. See Figure 5-46.

You can modify channel group and click OK to complete the settings.

Figure 5-46

5.3 Entering Main Menu

Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed, Click Main Menu and then login the system. The Main Menu is displayed, see Figure 5-47.

Figure 5-47

No.	Icon		Description
1	Function tiles		Includes eleven function tiles: Video, Backup, Camera, Network, Event, intelligent, Storage, Display, Account, System, and Info. Click each tile to open the configuration interface of the tile. Video: Search for and play back the recorded video saved on the Device. Backup: Search and back up the video files to the local PC or external storage device such as USB storage device. Camera: Configure the Encode settings of camera, remote device, snapshot settings etc. Network: Configure the network parameter (TCP/IP), Port settings, InstaOn Cloud etc. Event: Search for alarm information and configure alarm event actions. Intelligent: Configure the behavior detections by drawing rules for detecting tripwire, intrusion, abandoned objects, and missing objects, POS (Point of Sale), Face Detection and loT. Storage: Hard disk details, record plan configuration for video and snapshot. Display: Configure the display effect such as displaying content, image transparency, and resolution, and enable the zero-channel function. Account: Create, Delete, Modify user account or user group and Onvif User. System: General settings for DVR (WITHOUT HDD) like as date & time, language settings and PTZ settings. Info: Manage Log files and firmware version with device details..
2	Live		Click to go to the live view screen.
3	D		When you point to ^3, the current user account is displayed.
4		■ ■	Click Q, select Logout, Reboot, or Shutdown according to your actual situation.
5	□		Displays Cell Phone Client and Device SN QR Code. Cell Phone Client: Use your mobile phone to scan the QR code to add the device into the Cell Phone Client, and then you can start accessing the Device from your cell phone. Device SN: Obtain the Device SN by scanning the QR code. Go to the InstaOn management platform and add the Device SN into the platform. Then you can access and manage the device in the WAN. For details, please refer to the InstaOn operation manual. You can also configure InstaOn function in the local configurations. See “5.1.4.5 Configuring InstaOn Settings.“

Table 5-18

5.4 Controlling PTZ Cameras

PTZ is a mechanical platform that carries a camera and a protective cover and performs overall control remotely. A PTZ can move in both horizontal and vertical direction to provide all-around view to the camera.

CD NOTE

Before operating PTZ, please assure the network connection between PTZ and the Device.

- 1. Configuring PTZ Connection Settings

You need to configure the PTZ connection settings before use.

Local connection: RS485 Port for connecting Speed Dome or coaxial cable for connecting coaxial camera.
Remote connection: local area network.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Camera ^ PTZ.

The PTZ interface is displayed. See Figure 5-48.

Figure 5-48

Step 2 Configure the settings for the PTZ connection parameters. See Table 5-19.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to connect the PTZ camera to.
PTZ Type	Local: Connect through RS485 port or coaxial cable. Remote: Connect through network by adding IP address of PTZ camera to the Device.
Control Mode	In the Control Mode list, select Serial or HDCVI. For HDCVI series product, please select HDCVI. The control signal is sent to the PTZ through the coaxial cable. For the serial mode, the control signal is sent to the PTZ through the RS485 port.
Protocol	In the Protocol list, select the protocol for the PTZ camera, for example, select HDCVI3.0.

Parameter	Description
	In the Address box, enter the address for PTZ camera. The default is 1. CO NOTE
Address	The entered address must be the same with the address configured on
	the PTZ camera; otherwise the PTZ camera cannot be controlled from
	the Device.
Baudrate	In the Baudrate list, select the baudrate for the PTZ camera. The default is 9600.
Data Bits	The default is 8.
Stop Bits	The default is 1.
Parity	The default is NONE.

Table 5-19

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

EQ NOTE

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

- 1. Working with PTZ Control Panel

PTZ control panel performs the operations such as directing camera in eight directions, adjusting zoom, focus and iris settings, and quick positioning.

Basic PTZ Control Panel

Right-click on the live view screen and then select PTZ. The PTZ control panel is displayed. See Figure 5-49.

Figure 5-49

The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.

Speed

Controls the movement speed. The bigger the value is, the faster the movement will be.

Zoom

3: Wide angle.

^3: Long shot.

Focus

3: Zoom in. ^3: Zoom out.

Parameter	Description
Iris	3: Small. ^3: Large.
PTZ movement	Supports eight directions.
	Fast positioning button. • Positioning: Click ^3 to enter the fast positioning screen, and then click anywhere on the live view screen, the PTZ will turn to this point and move it to the middle of the screen. Zooming: On the fast positioning screen, drag to draw a square on the view. The square supports zooming. O Dragging upward is to zoom out, and dragging downward is to zoom in. O The smaller the square, the larger the zoom effect. CQ NOTE Not all models support this function and can only be controlled through mouse operations.


□	Click U, you can control the four directions (left, right, up, and down) PTZ movement through mouse operation.
	Click ^3 to open the expanded PTZ control panel.

Table 5-20

Expanded PTZ Control Panel

On the basic PTZ control panel, click

to open the expanded PTZ control panel to find more

options. See Figure 5-50.

Figure 5-50

• The functions with buttons in gray are not supported by the system.

• Right-click once to return to the interface of PTZ basic control panel.

Icon	Function	Icon	Function
01	Preset		Auto Pan

A * *-•	Tour		Flip
	Tour		Flip
	Pattern		Reset
	Autoscan		Click the AUX Config icon to open the PTZ functions settings interface.
3	AUX Switch	□	Click the Enter Menu icon to open the MENU OPERATION interface.

Table 5-21

- 1. Configuring PTZ Functions
    1. Configuring Presets

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

The Preset interface is displayed. See Figure 5-51.

Figure 5-51

Step 2 Click the direction arrows to the required position.

Step 3 In the Preset box, enter the value to represent the required position.

Step 4 Click Setting to complete the preset settings.

- - 1. Configuring Tours

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

The PTZ interface is displayed.

Step 2 Click the Tour tab.

The Tour tab is displayed. See Figure 5-52.

PTZ Preset Tour Pattern Border

Preset i

Patrol… o

Add Preset

Del Preset

Del Tour

Figure 5-52

Step 3 In the Patrol No. box, enter the value for the tour route.

Step 4 In the Preset box, enter the preset value.

Step 5 Click Add Preset.

A preset will be added for this tour.

ED NOTE

You can repeat adding more presets.
Click Del Preset to delete the preset for this tour. This operation can be repeated to delete more presets. Some protocols do not support deleting.
- - 1. Configuring Patterns

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

The PTZ interface is displayed.

Step 2

Click the Pattern tab.

The Pattern interface is displayed. See Figure 5-53.

Figure 5-53

Step 3 In the Pattern box, enter the value for pattern.

Step 4 Click Start to perform the directions operations. You can also go to the PTZ Control Panel to perform the operations of adjusting zoom, focus, iris, and directions.

Step 5 On the PTZ interface, click End to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring AutoScan

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click .

The PTZ interface is displayed.

Step 2 Click the Border tab.

The Border interface is displayed. See Figure 5-54.

Figure 5-54

Step 3 Click the direction arrows to position the left and right borders.

- 1. Calling PTZ Functions

After you have configured the PTZ settings, you can call the PTZ functions for monitoring from the Expanded PTZ Control Panel. See Figure 5-55.

a. Speed 5		No. 0	9	▼
— Zoom	+
< i.Q ► _		0\|		• • 1
— Focus	+
^v 8 — Iris	+	iol *		0

Figure 5-55

- - 1. Calling Presets

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the preset that you want to call.

Step 2 Click [Si to call the preset.

Step 3 Click [Si again to stop calling the preset.

- - 1. Calling Tours

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the tour that you want to call.

Step 2 Click to call the tour.

Step 3 Click

again to stop calling the tour.

- - 1. Calling Patterns

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the pattern that you want to call.

Step 2 Call I9l to call the pattern.

The PTZ camera moves according to the configured pattern repeatedly.

Step 3 Click ISI again to stop calling the pattern.

- - 1. Calling AutoScan

Step 1 On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, in the No. box, enter the value of the border that you want to call.

Step 2 Click SI.

The PTZ camera performs scanning according to the configured borders.

Step 3 Click l^l again to stop auto canning.

- - 1. Calling AutoPan

Step 1

On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

to start moving in horizontal direction.

Step 2 Click s

again to stop moving.

- - 1. Using AUX Button

On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click , the AUX setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-56.

In the Direct Aux list, select the option that corresponds to the applied protocol.
In the Aux Num box, enter the number that corresponds to the AUX switch on the

decoder.

AUX

On Off

Direct Aux

NONE

Aux Num

Figure 5-56

- 1. Calling OSD Menu

For the coaxial camera, you can call the OSD menu through the Expanded PTZ Control Panel. See Figure 5-55.

Step 1

On the Expanded PTZ Control Panel, click

The MENU OPERATION interface is displayed. See Figure 5-57.

Figure 5-57

Step 2 Click Enter.

The OSD menu is displayed. See Figure 5-58.

Figure 5-58

Step 3 On the MENU OPERATION interface, click the arrow button to select the onscreen parameters.

Step 4 Click Enter to complete the settings.

5.5 Configuring Camera Settings

- 1. Configuring Image Settings

You can configure the image settings such as saturation, contrast, brightness, sharpness for

each connected camera.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ IMAGE.

The IMAGE interface is displayed.See Figure 5-59 for analog channel and Figure 5 60 for digital channel.

Figure 5-59

Figure 5-60

Step 2 Configure the settings for the image parameters. See Table 5-22.

On the digital channel interface, click More Setting to display more parameters.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure.
Cable Type	In the Cable Type list, select the cable type that the camera uses. EQ NOTE
	Not all models support this function.
Period	In the Period list, select a time period for the image settings. The image settings will be only used during the selected period.
Effective Time	Enable the effective function. In the Effective Time box, enter the start time and end time for the period you selected.
Saturation	Adjusts the color shades. The bigger the value, the lighter the color will become. This value does not influence the general image lightness. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Contrast	Adjusts the image contrast. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the contrast between the light area and dark area will become. You can adjust this value when the contrast is not obvious. However, if the value is too big, the dark area is likely to become darker and the light area over exposed. If the value is too small, the image is likely to become dim. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.

Parameter	Description
Brightness	Adjusts the image brightness. The bigger the value is, the brighter the image will become. You can adjust this value when the image as a whole looks dark or bright. However, the image is likely to become dim if the value is too big. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50. The recommended range is between 40 and 60.
Hue	Adjusts the hue of image. The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 50.
Sharpness	Adjusts the sharpness of image edge. The bigger the value is, the more obvious the image edge, and the noise is also greater. The value ranges from 1 to 15. The default value is 1.
Image Enhance	Adjusts the image definition. The bigger the value is, the clearer the image will become, but there will be more noises.
NR	Reduces the noises from image. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
Config File	In the Config File list, select Day, Night, Normal, or Switch By Period. The system configures the parameters correspondingly. Day: Apply the configuration during daytime. Night: Apply the configuration during nighttime. Normal: Apply the configuration during day and night. Switch by Period: If you select this option, you need to configure the sunrise time and sunset time where you are located.
Mirror	Enable the function, the left and right side of the video image will be switched. It is disabled by default.
3D Denoise	This function specially applies to the image which frame rate is configured as 2 at least. It reduces the noises by making use of the information between two frames. The bigger the value is, the better the effect.
Flip	In the Flip list, you can select 180° to change the video image display. By default, the setting is No Flip.
Light	In the Light list, select Close or Enable to use the backlight compensation or not.
Scene Mode	Configure the white balance to adjust the general hue of the image. The default setting is Auto. Auto: Automatically apply white balance to different colors to make the image color display normally. Sunny: Apply the threshold value to sunny environment. Night: Apply the threshold value to night. Customized: Manually adjust the Red Gain and Blue Gain values.

Parameter

Description

Day & Night

Configure the color and black&white mode of the image. This setting is not affected by the configuration files. The default setting is Auto. • Color: The camera outputs color image only.

Auto: Depends on the camera, such as overall brightness and

whether there is an IR light, either color image or black&white image is output.

B/W: The camera outputs Black and white image only.
By Time: The camera outputs image according to the configure

the sunrise time and sunset time.

Table 5-22

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- 1. Configuring Encode Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Camera^ ENCODE ^ Encode.

The Encode interface is displayed.See Figure 5-61.

Figure 5-61

Step 2 Configure the settings for the main/sub streams parameters. See Table 5-23.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.
Smart Codec	Enable the smart codec function. This function can reduce the video bit stream for non-important recorded video to maximize the storage space.
Type	Main Stream: In the Type list, select General, MD (Motion Detect), or Alarm. Sub Stream: This setting is not configurable.

Parameter	Description
Compression	In the Compression list, select the encode mode. H.265: Main profile encoding. H.264H: High profile encoding. Low bit stream with high definition. This setting is recommended. H.264: General profile encoding. H.264B: Baseline profile encoding. This setting requires higher bit stream compared with other settings for the same definition.
Resolution	In the Resolution list, select resolution for the video. The maximum video resolution might be different dependent on your device model.
Frame Rate (FPS)	Configure the frames per second for the video. The higher the value, the clearer and smoother the image will become. Frame rate changes along with the resolution. Generally, in PAL format, you can select the value from 1 through 25; in NTSC format, you can select the value from 1 through 30. However, the specific range of frame rate that you can select depends on the capability of the Device.
Quality	This function is available if you select VBR in the Bit Rate List. The higher the value, the better the image will become.
I Frame Interval	The interval between two reference frames.
Bit Rate (Kb/S)	In the Bit Rate list, select a value or enter a customized value to change the image quality. The bigger the value is, the better the image will become.
Video	Enable the function for sub stream.
Audio Encode	Click More Setting, the More Setting interface is displayed. Audio Encode: This function is enabled by default for main stream. You need to manually enable it for sub stream 1. Once this function is enabled, the recorded video file is composite audio and video stream. Audio Source: In the Audio Source list, you can select LOCAL and HDCVI. O LOCAL: The audio signal is input from Audio input port. O HDCVI: The audio signal is input from HDCVI camera. Audio Format: In the Audio Format list, select a format that you need.
Audio Source
Audio Format

Table 5-23

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

- 1. Configuring Snapshot Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu^ Camera^ Encode > Snapshot.

The Snapshot interface is displayed.See Figure 5-62.

Figure 5-62

Step 2 Configure the settings for the snapshot parameters. See Table 5-24.

Parameter	Description
Manual Snap	In the Manual Snap list, select how many snapshots you want to take each time.
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.
Mode	In the Mode list, you can select Human Face, Event, or General as the event type for which you want to take a snapshot.
Image Size	In the Image Size list, select a value for the image.
Image Quality	Configures the image quality by 6 levels. The higher the level, the better the image will become.
Interval	Configures or customizes the snapshot frequency.

Table 5-24

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

EQ NOTE

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

- 1. Configuring Overlay Settings

You can configure to display system time and channel name on each channel window in the live view screen.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ OVERLAY ^ Overlay.

The Overlay interface is displayed. See Figure 5-63.

Figure 5-63

Step 2 Configure the settings for the text overlay parameters. See Table 5-25.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.
Time Display	Select the Time Display check box to display the system time on each channel window in the live view screen. In the Time Display list, select time display style.
Channel Title	Select the Channel Title check box to display the channel name on each channel window in the live view screen. In the Channel Title box, enter the name for the selected channel.

Table 5-25

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

- 1. Configuring Covered Area Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ OVERLAY ^ Cover-Area.

The Cover-Area interface is displayed. See Figure 5-64.

Figure 5-64

Step 2 Configure the settings for the covered area parameters. See Table 5-26.

Parameter

Description

Channel

In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the settings for.

Preview

Record

Preview: Select the Preview check box to apply the configured

covered block to the selected channel window in the live view screen.

Record: Select the Record check box to apply the configured

covered block to the selected channel window during recording.

To configure covering block, do the following:

Select the Preview check box or the Record check box, or

select the both. The “1,2, 3, 4” buttons are activated.

Click the buttons to select blocks.
A triangle solid black block is displayed. You can drag the block

to the area that you want to cover and adjust the size of the block.

You can configure total 4 covered blocks.

Table 5-26

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- 1. Configuring Channel Type

You can configure the channel type as Analog or IP channel.

Step 1 Select Main Menu^ Camera ^ CHANNEL TYPE.

The CHANNEL TYPE interface is displayed. See Figure 5-65.

Figure 5-65

Step 2 Configure the channels.

Analog Channel: Select the transmission medium such as CVI, CVBS, and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.
IP Channel: Select a channel for IP camera from the last channel number, for example, in Figure 5-65, select from the 17-24 check box. Then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.

Œ NOTE

The 17-24 channels are only for IP camera and the range changes dependent on the model you purchased.
The channel selection for analog camera or IP camera are in sequence, for example, if you want to select channels for IP camera, you need to select the 17-24 check box first, and then you cannot jump to select the channel 15 directly until you have selected the channel 16.

Step 3 Click Apply and follow the onscreen instructions to complete the settings.

5.5.7 Upgrading Coaxial Camera

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ COAXIAL UPGRADE.

The COAXIAL UPGRADE interface is displayed.See Figure 5-66.

Figure 5-66

Step 2 Click Browse.

The Browse interface is displayed.

Step 3 Select the upgrade file and click OK.

The COAXIAL UPGRADE interface is displayed.

ED NOTE

You need to insert the USB storage device that contains the upgrading files.

Step 4 Select the check box of the channel that you want to upgrade.

Step 5 Click Start Upgrade.

If the upgrading is successful, the system pops up a message indicating the upgrading

is completed. If the upgrading is failed, please check if the Device

5.6 Configuring Remote Devices

5.6.1 Adding Remote Devices

EQ NOTE

This function is available after you have configured the channel type as IP channel as described in previous section, see “5.5.6 Configuring Channel Type.”

You can add remote devices by adding the IP address.

Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION > Registration, the Registration interface is displayed. See Figure 5-67.

Figure 5-67

Parameter	Description
Uninitialized	Enable the Uninitialized function, the uninitialized devices out of the searched devices are displayed in the searched device list.
Initialize	Select the uninitialized device from the uninitialized device list, and the click Initialize to start initializing device.
Show Filter	In the Show Filter list, select the remote device type that you want to display in the searched device list. None: Display all types of devices. IPC: Display the front-end devices. DVR (WITHOUT HDD): Display all storage devices such as NVR, DVR (WITHOUT HDD) and HCVR. OTHER: Display the devices that do not belong to IPC or DVR (WITHOUT HDD) type.
Searched Device List	Displays the searched devices. You can view the device information such as status, IP address.
Device Search	Click Device Search, the searched devices display in the searched device list. To adjust the display sequence, in the title line, you can click the IP address, Manufacturer, Type, MAC Address, Port, or Device Name text. For example, click the IP address text, the sequence icon OZES is displayed. CQ NOTE
	“*” is displayed next to the added device.
Add	In the Searched Device List area, select the device that you want to add.
Manual Add	Add the device by manually configuring settings such as IP address, channel selection. For details, see “5.6.1.4 Adding Remote Devices Manually.“
Added Device List	Displays the added devices. You can edit and delete the device, and view the device information.

Parameter	Description
Delete	Select the check box of the added device, and then click Delete to delete the added device.
Import	Select the searched devices and then click Import to import the devices in batches.
Export	Select the added devices and then click Export. The exported devices information is saved into the USB storage device.

Table 5-27

5.6.1.2 Initializing Remote Devices

You can reset the password and IP address of the remote devices through initializing.

Step 1 Click Device Search.

The searched devices are displayed in the table. See Figure 5-68.

Figure 5-68

Step 2 Enable the Initialized function.

The uninitialized devices are displayed. See Figure 5-69.

Figure 5-69

Step 3 Select the uninitialized device that you want to initialize.

Step 4 Click Initialize.

The Enter Password interface is displayed. See Figure 5-70

Figure 5-70

Step 5 Configure the password and email information.

Q NOTE

If you select the Using current device password and email info check box, the remote device automatically uses the current password and email information, so you do not need to set the password and email address again and can go to Step 6.

Clear the Using current device password and email info check box.

The password setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-71.

Figure 5-71

2) Configure the settings for the password setting parameters. See Table 5-28.

Parameter	Description
User	The default is admin.
Password	The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , “;”,”:” and “&”).
Confirm Password	Please enter a strong password according to the password strength bar indication.

Table 5-28

3) Click Next.

The Password Protection interface is displayed. See Figure 5-72

Figure 5-72

Select the Email Address box and enter the email address that you want to reserve for password reset in the future.

CQ NOTE

If you do not want to set the reserved email address, click Skip.

Step 6 Click Next.

The NETWORK interface is displayed. See Figure 5-73.

Figure 5-73

Step C Configure the IP address.

Select the DHCP check box, you do not need to enter the IP address information, because the system will allocate one IP address to the remote device.
Select the STATIC check box, you need to enter the IP address, subnet mast, default gateway, and incremental value. The system will allocate the IP address to the remote devices by progressively increasing the last part of the IP address when initializing devices in batches.

EQ NOTE

When configuring IP address for multiple remote devices which were not in the same network segment, these remote devices will belong to the same network segment after configuration.

Step 8 Click Next.

The initializing is started. After the process is completed, see Figure 5-74.

Figure 5-74

Step 9 Click Finished to complete the settings.

5.6.1.3 Adding Remote Devices Automatically

Step 1 On the Registration interface, click Device Search

The searched devices are displayed. See Figure 5-75.

Figure 5-75

Step 2 Select the check box of the device.

Step 3 Click Add.

The device is added into the Added Device area.

Q NOTE

You can also double-click the device to add it into the Added Device area.
You can add devices in batches.

5.6.1.4 Adding Remote Devices Manually

Step 1 On the Registration interface, click Manual Add.

The Manual Add interface is displayed. See Figure 5-76.

Figure 5-76

Step 2 Configure the settings for the manual adding device parameters. See Table 5-29.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select the channel that you want use on the Device to connect the remote device.
Manufacturer	In the Manufacturer list, select the manufacturer of the remote device.
IP Address	In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of remote device. CD NOTE
	The default is 192.168.0.0 which the system cannot connect to.
RTSP Port	The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
HTTP Port	The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your actual situation. If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.
User Name	Enter the user name of the remote device.
Password	Enter the password of the user for the remote device
Remote Channel	Enter the remote channel number of the remote device that you want to add.
Decoder Buffer	In the Decoder Buffer list, select Default, Realtime, or Fluent.
Protocol Type	Select Auto, TCP, UDP, or MULTICAST. The default is TCP.

Table 5-29

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

CD NOTE

• Only one device can be added manually at one time.

•

indicates successful connection and

indicates connection failed.

- - 1. Modifying or Deleting Remote Devices

You can modify and delete the added devices.

To modify the remote devices, do the following:

Step 1 Click □ or double-click a device.

The Edit interface is displayed. See Figure 5-77.

Figure 5-77

Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to modify settings for.

Step 3 Click OK to save the settings.

ED NOTE

Click Copy to copy the user name and password to other channels.

To delete one or more added devices, do the following:

Click

to delete one device

o Select the check box of the devices that you want to delete, and then click Delete.

- - 1. Modifying IP Address

You can modify a single IP address or multiple IP addresses of remote devices at the one time.

• To modify a single IP address, do the following:

Step 1 In the Searched Device list area, click □ for the device that you want to modify IP.

The Modify IP interface is displayed. See Figure 5-78.

Figure 5-78

Step 2 Configure the settings for IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, user name, and password.

Step 3 Enable the Add function to add the device into the Added Device area.

Step 4 Click OK to save the settings.

• To modify IP address in batches, do the following:

Step 1 In the Searched Device list area, select the devices that you want to modify IP address in batches.

Step 2

Click □.

The Modify IP interface is displayed. See Figure 5-79.

Figure 5-79

Step 3 Enable the Batch Modify function.

Step 4 Configure the settings for start IP address (the IP address is allocated in sequence), subnet mask, default gateway, user name, and password.

Step 5 Enable the Add function to add the devices into the Added Device area.

Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.

- - 1. Exporting IP Address

You can export the added IP address to the USB storage device.

CD NOTE

The exported information is saved in .csv file, which includes IP address, port number, channel number, manufacturer, user name, and password.

Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.

Step 2 Click Export.

The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 5-80.

Browse

Device Name sdcl(USBUSB) • 3.71 GB/3.73 GB(Free/Total) Refresh Format

Address /

Name	Size	Type	Delete	Play
■ {fd2b025a-ac98-e383-13ea-lcf86fc539fb}		Folder	a
■ ScreenShot		Folder	a
là printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk	1.8 KB	File	a
lg kmsg_printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk	1.8 KB	Ale	dk
1 SmartPlayer.exe.lnk	L7 KB	File	□
a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317134749_…	26 KB	File	n
g Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317135000_…	26 KB	File	n	5′
Bl ty.lnk	1.7 KB	File	n
Bl printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk	1.8 KB	Ale	n
Bl kmsg_printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk	1.8 KB	Ale	3

New Folder OK Back

Figure 5-80

Step 3 Configure the save path.

Step 4 Click OK to save the settings.

A pop-up message indicating “Successfully exported” is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK.

- - 1. Importing IP Address

You can add remote devices by importing IP address information.

Step 1 Insert the USB storage device to the USB port of the Device.

Step 2 Click Import.

The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 5-81.

Figure 5-81

Step 3 Select the file that you want to import.

Step 4 Click OK to start importing.

After importing is completed, a pop-up message indicating “The import succeeded” is displayed.

EQ NOTE

If the IP address that you want to import already exists in the Device, the system will pop up a message to ask you whether to overwrite the existing content.

Click OK to replace the existing one.
Click Cancel to add it as a separate device in the Added Device area.

CAUTION

You can edit the exported .csv file and be cautious not to change the file format; otherwise the file cannot be imported as it will be judged as invalid.
The language of .csv file must match the Device language.
The import and export through customized protocol is not supported.

5.6.2 Managing Remote Devices

You can view the status of remote devices and upgrade.

- - 1. Viewing Status

You can view the device information such as connection status, IP address, motion detection, video loss detection, camera name, and manufacturer.

Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION > Status, the Status interface is displayed.

See Figure 5-82.

Figure 5-82

- - 1. Viewing Firmware Information

You can view the device firmware information such as channel number, IP address, manufacturer, system version, video input, audio input, and alarm in.

Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ REGISTRATION > Firmware, the Firmware interface is displayed. See Figure 5-83.

Figure 5-83

- - 1. Upgrading Remote Devices

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Camera ^ REGISTRATION > Upgrade.

The Upgrade interface is displayed.See Figure 5-84.

Figure 5-84

Step 2 Upgrade the device.

• File Upgrade

Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.
Select the devices that you want to upgrade.
Click File upgrade.

The File Upgrade interface is displayed.

Select the upgrading files and click Apply.

• Online Upgrade

Click Detect or select the check box the device that you want to upgrade and click Manual Check.

The system starts detecting if there is a new version on the online server.

Select the check box of all the devices that have new version.
Click Online Upgrade.

EQ NOTE

The system will pop up a message to indicate if the upgrading is successful.
You can use the Type list to filter the devices so that you can find the devices

quickly.

1. Configuring Record Settings

You can record video manually or automatically and configure the recording settings to main stream and sub stream respectively.

- 1. Enabling Record Control

CAUTION

Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access STORAGE settings.
Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.

To enter the record control interface, do the following:

Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu, select Manual ■> Record Control. The RECORD interface is displayed, see Figure 5-85.

Figure 5-85

Step 2 Configure the settings for the record control parameters. See Table 5-30.

Parameter	Description
Channel	Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels. You can select a single channel or select All.
Record status	Auto: Automatically record according to the record type and recording time as configured in the recording schedule. Manual: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected channel. Stop: Do not record.
Snapshot status	Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding channels.

Table 5-30

Step 3 Click Apply.

- 1. Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule

You need to configure the storage schedule for the recorded video so that the recorded video can be saved. For details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule.”

1. Configuring Snapshot Settings
  1. Configuring Snapshot Trigger

The snapshot is divided into scheduled snapshot, event triggered snapshot, and face detection triggered snapshot. When the both are enabled, the event triggered snapshot has the priority.

If there is no alarm event, the system performs scheduled snapshot.
If there is any alarm event, the system performs event triggered snapshot.

5.8.1.1 Configuring Scheduled Snapshot

Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed.

Step 2 On the shortcut menu, select Manual ^ Record Control.

The RECORD interface is displayed.

Step 3 In the Snapshot area, enable the snapshot for the channels if needed. See Figure 586.

Figure 5-86

Step 4 Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot.

The Snapshot interface is displayed.

Step 5 In the Mode list, select General, and then configure other parameters. See Figure 587.

Figure 5-87

Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.

If you have configured the snapshot schedule, the configuration has been completed.
If you have not configured the snapshot schedule, see “5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule.”
- - 1. Configuring Event Triggered Snapshot

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot.

The Snapshot interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the Mode list, select Event, and then configure other parameters. See Figure 5-88.

Figure 5-88

Step 3 Select Main Menu ^ Event ■> VIDEO DETECT, and select the event type to configure, for example, select the Motion Detect tab. See Figure 5-89.

Figure 5-89

Step 4 Select the Snapshot check box and select the corresponding channel.

Step 5 Click Apply.

- - 1. Configuring Face Detection Triggered Snapshot

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Camera ^ Encode > Snapshot.

The Snapshot interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the Mode list, select Human Face, and then configure other parameters. See Figure 5-90.

Figure 5-90

Step 3 Select Main Menu ->Intelligent^ Face Detect ^ Parameters > Human Face.

The Human Face interface is displayed. See Figure 5-91.

Figure 5-91

Step 4 Select the Snapshot check box and select the corresponding channel.

Step 5 Click Apply.

- 1. Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule

You need to configure the storage schedule for the snapshot so that the snapshot can be saved.

For details, see “5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage Schedule.”

- 1. Backing up Snapshots to FTP

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Storage ^ FTP.

The FTP interface is displayed. See Figure 5-92.

Step 2 Enable the FTP function and configure the parameters. For details, see “5.17.8 Configuring FTP Storage Settings.”

The snapshots will be uploaded to FTP for backup.

5.9 Playing Back Video

- 1. Enabling Record Control

CAUTION

Manual recording operation requires the user have the permission to access STORAGE settings.
Check to ensure the HDD installed in the Device has been formatted properly.

To enter the record control interface, do the following:

Step 1 Right-click on the live view screen, the shortcut menu is displayed. On the shortcut menu, select Manual ■> Record Control. The RECORD interface is displayed, see Figure 5-93.

RECORD

Mainstream All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Auto

Manual

Stop

Sub Stream

Auto

Manual

Stop

Snapshot

Enable

Disable

Apply Back

Figure 5-93

Step 2 Configure the settings for the record control parameters. See 0.

Parameter	Description
Channel	Displays all the analog channels and the connected digital channels. You can select a single channel or select All.
Record status	Auto: Automatically record according to the record type and recording time as configured in the recording schedule. Manual: Keep general recording for 24 hours for the selected channel. Stop: Do not record.
Snapshot status	Enable or disable the scheduled snapshot for the corresponding channels.

Table 5-31

- 1. Instant Playback

You can use the instant playback function to play back the previous five minutes to sixty minutes of the recorded video in any channel. For details about instant playback function, see “5.2.2.1 Instant Playback.”

- 1. Main Interface of Video Playback

You can search for and play back the recorded video saved on the Device.

Select Main Menu ^ Video, the video search interface is displayed. See Figure 5-94.

Figure 5-94

No.	Function	Description
1	Display Window	Display the searched recorded video or picture. It supports playing in single-channel, 4-channel, 9-channel, and 16-channel simultaneously. ED NOTE
	Display Window	When playing back in a single channel mode, hold down the left
		mouse button to select the area that you want to enlarge. The
		area is enlarged after the left mouse button is released. To exit the
		enlarged status, right-click on the image.
2	Playback Controls Bar	Playback control buttons. For details about the control buttons, see “5.9.3.2 Introducing Playback Controls.“
3	Time Bar	Display the type and time period of the current recorded video. In the 4-channel layout, there are four-time bars are displayed; in the other view layouts, only one-time bar is displayed. Click on the colored area to start playback from a certain time. In the situation when you are configuring the settings, rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is zooming in from 0. In the situation when playback is ongoing, rotate the wheel button on the time bar, the time bar is zooming from the time point where the playback is located. Time bar colors: Green indicates general type; Red indicates external alarm; Yellow indicates motion detection; Blue indicates intelligent events; Purple indicates POS events. For some models, when you are clicking on the blank area in the time bar, the system automatically jumps to the next time point where there is a recorded video located.
4	Play Status	Includes two playback statuses: Play and Stop.
5	Sync	Select the Sync check box to simultaneously play recorded videos of different channels in the same period in multi-channel view.

No.	Function	Description
6	Record type	Select the check box to define the recording type to search for.
7	Search type	Select the content to play back: Record, PIC, Splice Playback. For details about the selecting search type, see “5.9.3.3 Selecting Search Type.“
8	Calendar	Click the date that you want to search, the time bar displays the corresponding record. The dates with record or snapshot have a small solid circle under the date.
9	View Layout and Channel Selection	In the CAM NAME list, select the channel(s) that you want to play back. • The window split is decided by how you select the channel(s). For example, if you select one channel, the playback is displayed in the single-channel view; if you select two to four channels, the playback is displayed in the four-channel view. The maximum is eight channels.
		• Clink	M	tn Q\A/itnh thn Qtrnam«;			M	indicates main .
		stream, and			S	indicates sub stream
10	Video Splice	Splice a section of recorded video and save it. For details about splicing a recorded video, see “5.9.3.4 Clipping Recorded Video.“
11	Backup	Back up the recorded video files. For details, see “5.9.3.5 Backing up Recorded Video.“
12	List Display	This area includes Mark List and File List. ^3: Click the Mark List button, the marked recorded video list is displayed. Double-click the file to start playing. ^3: Click the File List button, the searched recorded video list is displayed. You can lock the files. For details, see “5.9.8 Using the File List.“
13	Full Screen	Click ^3 to display in full screen. In the full screen mode, point to the bottom of the screen, the time bar is displayed. Right-click on the screen to exit full screen mode.
14	Time Bar Unit	You can select 24hr, 2hr, 1hr, or 30min as the unit of time bar. The time bar display changes with the setting.

Table 5-32

- - 1. Introducing Playback Controls Bar

You can perform the operations such as control the speed of playback, add mark, and take

snapshots through the playback controls bar. See Figure 5-95 and Table 5-33.

CD NOTE

The play backward function and playback speed are dependent on the product version. The actual product shall govern. You can also contact the technical support to consult the hardware version information.

Icon	Function
□. m	Play/Pause. During playing back, you can switch between play and pause.
□	Stop. During playing back, you can click the Stop button to stop playback.
□.m	Play Backward. • During playing back, click the Play Backward button to backward play the recorded video, the button switches to EH; click EH to stop playing backward. During playing back, click to start playing forward.
□. □	Previous Frame/Next Frame. * When the playback is paused, click UJ or click U3 to play single-frame recorded video. When playing back single-frame recorded video, click 13 to start playing forward.
□	Slow Playback. During playing back, click ^3 to set the speed of slow playback as SlowX1/2, SlowX1/4, SlowX1/8, or SlowX1/16. During fast playback, click ^3 to slow down the speed of fast playback.
□	Fast Playback. During playing back, click ^3 to set the speed of fast playback as FastX2, FastX4, FastX8, or FastX16. * During slow playback, click ^3 to speed up slow playback.
El. d	Previous Day/Next Day. Click ^3 or click C2 to play the previous day or next day of the current recorded video.
L o \|	Adjust volume of playback.
	Smart Search. For details about the using the smart search, see “5.9.4 Smart Search.“

Icon	Function
El	In the full screen mode, click to take a snapshot and save into the USB storage device or mobile HDD.
□	Add Mark for the recorded view. For details about adding mark, see “5.9.5 Marking and Playing Back Video.“
	Hide POS Hide.
	During single-channel playback, click information on the screen.	^9	to display or hide POS

Table 5-33

- - 1. Selecting Search Type

You can search the recorded videos, splice, or snapshots from HDD or external storage device.

From R/W HDD: Recorded videos or snapshots playback from HDD of the Device. See Figure 5-96.

Figure 5-96

From I/O Device: Recorded videos playback from external storage device. See Figure 597.

Click Browse, select the save path of recorded video file that you want to play. Doubleclick the video file or click 13 to start playing.

Figure 5-97

5.9.3.4 Clipping Recorded Video

During playback, clip sections of recorded video and save to the USB storage device. For the video clip interface, see Figure 5-98.

00:00:00 – 00:00:00

Figure 5-98

Step 1 Select a recorded video that you want to play.

• Click to start playing from the beginning.

• Double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.

Step 2

Click on the time bar to select the start time, and then click

to start clipping.

Step 3 Click on the time bar to select the start time, and then click

to stop clipping.

Step 4 Click .

The BACKUP dialog box is displayed. You can back up the files.

NOTE

You can clip the video of a single-channel or multiple channels.
Maximum 1024 files can be backed up at one time.
The files that are selected in the File List cannot be clipped.

5.9.3.5 Backing up Recorded Video

You can back up the recorded video file or splice video file into the USB storage device.

Step 1 Select the recorded video file that you want to back up. You can select the following two types of files:

Recorded video file: Click ^3, the File List area is displayed. Select the file(s) that you want to back up.
Splice video file. For details about splicing video file, see “5.9.3.4 Clipping Recorded Video.“

Step 2 Click .

The BACKUP dialog box is displayed. See Figure 5-99.

Figure 5-99

Step 3 Click Backup.

ED NOTE

If you do not want to back the file, clear the check box.

5.9.4 Smart Search

During playback, you can analyze a certain area to find if there was any motion detection event occurred. The system will display the images with motion events of the recorded video.

ED NOTE

Not all models support this function.

To use the Smart Search function, you need to enable the motion detection for the channel by selecting Main Menu ^ Alarm ^ Video Detect ^ Motion Detect.

To use the Smart Search function, do the following:

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Video, the video search interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the CAME NAME list, select the channel(s) that you want to play.

Step 3 Click 13 or double-click anywhere in the time bar colored area to start playback.

Step 4 Click

The grid is displayed on the screen.

EQ NOTE

Only single-channel supports smart search.
If multi-channels are selected, double-click on the channel window to display this channel only on the screen, and then you can start using smart search function.

Step 5 Drag the pointer to select the searching area. ED NOTE

The grid area supports 22×18(PAL) and 22×15(NTSC).

Step 6

Click

The screen starts playing back the motional splices of recorded video for the selected searching area.

Step 7

Click

to exit the playback.

5.9.5 Marking and Playing Back Video

You can mark the recording for somewhere important. Then you can easily find the marked recording by searching time and mark name.

Marking a Video

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Video, the video search interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the playback mode, click

The Add Mark dialog box is displayed. See Figure 5-100.

Figure 5-100

Step 3 In the Name box, enter a name.

Step 4 Click OK.

This marked video file displays in the Mark List.

Playing Back Marked Video

CD NOTE

This function is supported on single-channel playback.

Step 1 In the CAME NAME list, select one channel.

Step 2 Click

The Mark List interface is displayed. See Figure 5-101.

Figure 5-101

Step 3 Double-click the file that you want to play back.

To search the marked video by time, in the SEARCH box on the top of the interface,

enter the time, and then click

Playing Back Time before the Mark

You can configure to play N seconds of the marked video before the marked time.

Step 1 In the Name box, enter the name of a marked video.

Step 2 In the Playback time before the mark box, enter N seconds.

Step 3 Click

The playback starts from N seconds before the marked time.

NOTE

If there is N seconds exist before the marked time, the playback starts from N seconds before the marked time. If there is not, it plays back as much as there is.

Managing Marked Video

In the Mark List interface, click ^3, the Manager interface is displayed. See Figure 5-102.

Figure 5-102

Be default, it manages all the marked videos of the selected channel.
To search the marked video, select channel number from the Channel list, enter time in Start Time box and End Time box, and then click Search.
All the marked videos display in time order.
To modify the name of marked video, double-click a marked video, the Edit Mark dialog box is displayed.
To delete the marked video, select the marked video, and then click Delete.

NOTE

After opening the Manger interface, the playback will pause until exiting this interface. If the marked video that was in playing back is deleted, the playback will start from the first marked video in the Mark List.

- 1. Playing Back Snapshots

You can search and play back the snapshots.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Video, the video search interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the Search Type list, select PIC.

Step 3 In the Channel list, select a channel number.

Step 4 In the Calendar area, select a date.

Step 5 Click 13.

The system starts playing snapshots according to the configured intervals.

- 1. Playing Back Splices

You can clip the recorded video files into splices and then play back at the same time to save your time.

NOTE

Not all models support this function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Video, the video search interface is displayed.

Step 2 In the Search Type list, select Splice Playback; In the Split Mode list, select 4, 9, or

16. See Figure 5-103.

Figure 5-103

Step 3 In the Calendar area, select a date.

Step 4 In the CAM NAME list, select a channel.

Q NOTE

Only single-channel supports this function.

Step 5 Start playing back splices. See Figure 5-104.

• Click □, the playback starts from the beginning.

• Double-click anywhere on the time bar, the playback starts from where you click.

Figure 5-104

Q NOTE

Every recorded video file must be at least five minutes. If a recorded video file is less than 20 minutes but still choose to split into four windows, the system will automatically adjust the windows quantity to ensure every splice is more than five minutes, and in this case it is possible that there are no images are displaying in some windows.

5.9.8 Using the File List

You can view all the recorded videos within a certain period from any channel in the File List.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Video, the video search interface is displayed.

Step 2 Select a channel(s).

Step 3

Click

The File List interface is displayed. See Figure 5-105.

Figure 5-105

Step 4 Start playback.

Click , the playback starts from the first file by default.
Click any file, the system plays back this file.

Q2 NOTE

In the time box on the top of the file list interface, you can enter the specific time to search the file that you want to view.
In the File List area, there are 128 files can be displayed.
File type: R indicates general recorded video; A indicates recorded video with external alarms; M indicates recorded video with motion detection events; I indicates recorded video with intelligent vents.
Click a to return to the interface with calendar and CAM NAME list.

Locking and Unlocking the Recorded Video

To lock the recorded video, in the File List interface, select the check box of the recorded

video, and then click LU. The locked video will not be covered.

•

To view the locked information, click

, the FILE LOCKED interface is displayed.

NOTE

The recorded video that is under writing or overwriting cannot be locked.

To unlock the recorded video, in the FILE LOCKED interface, select the video, and then click Unlock. See Figure 5-106.

Figure 5-106

5.10 Alarm Events Settings

- 1. Video Detection

Video detection adopts computer vision and image processing technology. The technology analyzes the video images to detect the obvious changes such as moving objects and blurriness. The system activates alarms when such changes are detected.

- - 1. Configuring Motion Detect Settings

When the moving object appears, and moves fast enough to reach the preset sensitivity value, the system activates the alarm.

To configure the motion, detect settings, do the following:

Step 1 Select Main Menu^ Events VIDIEO DETECT > Motion Detect.

The Motion Detect interface is displayed.See Figure 5-107.

Figure 5-107

Step 2 Configure the settings for the motion detection parameters. See Table 5-34.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select a channel to set the motion detection.
Region	Click Setting to define the motion detection region.
Enable MD	Enable or disable the motion detection function.
Enable PIR	PIR function helps enhancing the accuracy and validity of motion detect. It can filter the meaningless alarms that are activated by the objects such as falling leaves, flies. The detection range by PIR is smaller than the field angle. PIR function is enabled by default if it is supported by the cameras. Enabling PIR function will get the motion detect to be enabled automatically to generate motion detection alarms; if the PIR function is not enabled, the motion detect just has the general effect. £D NOTE Only when the channel type is CVI, the PIR function can be enabled. If the camera does not support PIR function, it will be unusable. If the Device does not support PIR function, it will not be displayed on the interface.
Period	Define a period during which the motion detection is active.
Anti-Dither	Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.

Parameter	Description
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Show Message	Select the Show Message check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Alarm Upload	Select the Alarm Upload check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email	Select the Send Email check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. ED NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
	Main Menu ■> Network ^ Email.
Record Channel	Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs. ED NOTE
Record Channel	The recording for motion detection and auto recording function
	must be enabled. For details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded
	Video Storage Schedule” and “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.“
PTZ	Click Setting to display the PTZ interface. Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs. ED NOTE
	Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.
Post Record	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Tour	Select the Tour check box to enable a tour of the selected channels. ED NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured
	in Main Menu ^ Display ■+ Tour.

Parameter	Description
	Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. EQ NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the following settings are
Snapshot	configured:
	•	The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in
		Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule > Snapshot.
	•	Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Snapshot, in the Mode list,
		select Event.
Video Matrix	Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in Main Menu^ Display ^ Tour. EQ NOTE
	Not all models support this function.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log	Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a motion detection event.

Table 5-34

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

EQ NOTE

Click Default to restore the default setting.
Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.
Click Test to test the settings.

Setting the Motion Detection Region

Step 1 Next to Region, click Setting.

The region setting screen is displayed.

Step 2 Point to the middle top of the interface.

The setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-108.

Figure 5-108

Step 3 Configure the regions settings. You can configure totally four regions.

Select one region, for example, click .
Drag on the screen to select the region that you want to detect.

The selected area shows the color that represents the region.

3) Configure the parameters.

Parameter	Description
Name	Enter a name for the region.
Sensitivity	Every region of every channel has an individual sensitivity value. The bigger the value is, the easier the alarms can be activated.
Threshold	Adjust the threshold for motion detect. Every region of every channel has an individual threshold.

Figure 5-109

ED NOTE

When anyone of the four regions activates motion detect alarm, the channel where this region belongs to will activate motion detect alarm.

Step 4 Right-click on the screen to exit the region setting interface.

Step 5 On the Motion Detect interface, click Apply to complete the settings.

Setting Motion Detection Period

ED NOTE

The system only activates the alarm in the defined period.

Step 1 Next to Period, click Setting.

The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-110.

Figure 5-110

Step 2 Define the motion detection period. By default, it is active all the time.

Define the period by drawing.

O Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select the active period.

O Define for several days of a week: Click ^9 before each day, the icon

switches to a. On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days with a will take the same settings.

O Define for all days of a week: Click All, all e switches to E3. On the

timeline of any day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same settings.

Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.

1) Click

The Period interface is displayed. See Figure 5-111.

Figure 5-111

Enter the time frame for the period and select the check box to enable the settings.

O There are six periods for you to set for each day.

O Under Copy, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.

Click OK to save the settings.

Step 3 On the Motion Detect interface, click Apply to complete the settings.

5.10.1.2 Configuring Video Loss Settings

When the video loss occurs, the system activates the alarm. To configure the Video loss settings, do the following:

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Event ^ VIDIEO DETECT ■> Video Loss.

The Video Loss interface is displayed. See Figure 5-112.

Figure 5-112

Step 2 To configure the settings for the video loss detection parameters, see “5.10.1.1 Configuring Motion Detect Settings.”

EQ NOTE

For PTZ activation, different from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

EQ NOTE

Click Default to restore the default setting.
Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

5.10.1.3 Configuring Tampering Settings

When the camera lens is covered, or the video is displayed in a single color because of the causes such as sunlight status, the monitoring cannot be continued normally. To avoid such situations, you can configure the tampering alarm settings.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Event ^ VIDIEO DETECT ^ Tampering.

The Tampering interface is displayed.See Figure 5-113.

Figure 5-113

Step 2 To configure the settings for the tampering detection parameters, see “5.10.1.1 Configuring Motion Detect Settings.”

EQ NOTE

For PTZ activation, different from motion detection, the video loss detection can activate PTZ preset, tour, and pattern.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

EQ NOTE

Click Default to restore the default setting.
Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the motion detection settings to, and then click Apply.

5.10.1.4 Configuring Diagnosis Settings

EQ NOTE

This function can be used only when it is supported by the camera.

When the video appear the conditions such as blurry, overexposed, or the color changes, the system activates the alarm.

To configure the diagnosis settings, do the following:

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Events VIDIEO DETECT > Diagnosis.

The Diagnosis interface is displayed.See Figure 5-114.

Figure 5-114

Step 2 To configure the settings for the diagnosis parameters, see “5.10.1.1 Configuring

Motion Detect Settings.”

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

EQ NOTE

Click Default to restore the default setting.

Setting the Types for Diagnosing Targets

Step 1 Next to Rule, click Setting.

The Diagnosis interface is displayed. See Figure 5-115.

Figure 5-115

Step 2 Select the items that you want to diagnose and set the threshold (30 by default). See Table 5-35.

Parameter	Description
Stripe	A horizontal, vertical or diagonal stripe that might appear in the video because of device aging or electronic interruption. Such stripe brings visual interruption.
Noise	Video noises such as blurriness or quality reduction that is caused by optical distortion or device problem during camera shooting.
Color Cast	Variances in the normal proportions of RGB colors.

Parameter	Description
Out of Focus	Blurry video is caused during camera shooting, transferring and processing. Such condition is a common image quality reduction problem and defined as out of focus.
Overexposure	The video brightness refers to the intensity of image pixel. The range is between 0 (the darkest black) and 255 (the brightest white). If the brightness exceeds the threshold, the image is over exposed.
Threshold	The range is from 1 through 100. If the value after diagnosing is higher than what you set, the system activates the alarm to the corresponding diagnosing types such as stripe.

Table 5-35

Step 3 Click OK to save the settings.

The system returns to the Diagnosis interface.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

ED NOTE

Click Default to restore the default setting.

5.10.2 Intelligent Function

Please disable IP channels function first before using IVS function.

IVS function processes and analyzes the images to extract the key information to match with the preset rules. When the detected behaviors match with the rules, the system activates alarms.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Intelligent.

The INTELL SETTING interface is displayed. See Figure 5-116.

Figure 5-116

Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel number that you want to configure the IVS function for.

Step 3 Click Add.

One line of rule is displayed. See Figure 5-117.

Figure 5-117

Step 4 Configure the parameters for the rule that you selected.

Step 5 Select the check box of the rule to enable it.

Step 6 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring Tripwire Rules

When the target object crosses the tripwire in the defined direction, the system activates alarms.

The tripwire can be configured as a straight line or broken line.
Supports detecting one-way or two-way tripwire crossing.
Supports multiple tripwires in the same scenario to meet the complexity.
Supports size filtering for target.

Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the Type list, select Tripwire. See Figure 5-118.

Figure 5-118

Step 2 Draw a tripwire.

In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.
Click □.

The monitoring screen to configure the tripwire rules is displayed. See Figure 5119.

Figure 5-119

3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See Table 5-36.

Parameter	Description
Name	Enter the customized rule name.
Direction	Set the direction of the tripwire. You can choose A to B (left to right), B to A (right to left), and Both.
Filtering Target	Click	to draw areas to filter the target.

Parameter	Description
	CQ NOTE
	You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and
	minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is
	smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,
	no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger
	than the minimum size.

Table 5-36

Drag to draw a tripwire. The tripwire can be a straight line, broken line or polygon.
Click Save to save the settings.

Step 3 Click

to set the actions to be triggered.

The Trigger interface is displayed. See Figure 5-120.

Trigger

Period Alarm Out Show Message Record Channel	Setting	Latch Send Email	10	Sec.

	Setting Alarm Upload
PTZ	Setting	Post Record	10	Sec.
Tour
Snapshot
Buzzer		Log
Voice Prompts	None

OK Back

Figure 5-120

Step 4 Configure the triggering parameters. See Table 5-37.

Parameter

Description

Period

Click Set to display set interface.

Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see “Setting Motion Detection Period” section in “5.10.1.1 Configuring Motion Detect Settings.“

Alarm Out

Click Setting to display setting interface.

General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm

devices connected to the selected output port.

External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the

connected alarm box.

Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices

connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.

Parameter	Description
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Show Message	Select the Show Message check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Alarm Upload	Select the Alarm Upload check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email	Select the Send Email check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. ED NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
	Main Menu ■> Network ^ Email.
Record Channel	Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs. ED NOTE
Record Channel	The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function
	must be enabled. For details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded
	Video Storage Schedule” and “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.“
PTZ	Click Set to display the PTZ interface. Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs. CD NOTE
	Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.
Post Record	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Tour	Select the Tour check box to enable a tour of the selected channels. ED NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured
	in Main Menu ^ Display^ Tour.
	Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. ED NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the following settings are
Snapshot	configured:
	• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in
	Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ■+ Snapshot.
	• Select Main Menu ^Camera ^ Snapshot, in the Mode list,
	select Event.
Video Matrix	Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in “Main Menu ^ Display ^ Tour.”

Parameter	Description
	CQ NOTE
	Not all models support this function.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log	Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a motion detection event.

Table 5-37

Step 5 Click Apply to save the settings.

The INTELL SETTING interface is displayed.

Step 6 Select the Enable check box, and then click Apply.

The tripwire detecting function is active. When the target object crosses the tripwire in the defined direction, the system activates alarms.

5.10.2.2 Configuring Intrusion Rules

When the target enters and leaves the area, or the target appears in the defined area, the system activates alarms.

You can define the shape and quantity of intrusion areas.
Supports detecting the behaviors that enter and leave the intrusion areas.
Supports detecting the behaviors that are moving in the intrusion areas. The quantity of

areas and lasting time can be configured.

Supports size filtering for target.

Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the Type list, select Intrusion. See Figure 5-121.

Figure 5-121

Step 2 Draw a tripwire.

In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.
Click □.

The monitoring screen to configure the intrusion rules is displayed. See Figure 5122.

Figure 5-122

3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See Table 5-3 8Table 5-36.

Parameter	Description
Name	Enter the customized rule name.
Action	Configure the actions that are defined as intrusion. You can select the Appear check box and the Cross-check box.
Direction	In the Direction list, select the direction of crossing the configured area. You can select Enter&Exit, Enters, and Exits.
	Click ^3 to draw areas to filter the target. ED NOTE
Filtering Target	You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and
Filtering Target	minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is
	smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,
	no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger
	than the minimum size.

Table 5-38

Drag to draw an area.
Click Save to save the settings.

Step 3 Click

to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see “5.10.2.1 Configuring

Tripwire Rules.”

Step 4 Select the Enable check box, and then click Apply.

The intrusion detecting function is active. When the target enters and leaves the area, or the target appears in the defined area, the system activates alarms.

5.10.2.3 Configuring Abandoned Rules

When the object is placed in the defined detection area for more than the set time, the system activates alarms.

You can define the shape and quantity of intrusion areas.
Period value can be configured.
Supports size filtering for target.

Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the Type list, select Abandoned.

The Abandoned interface is displayed. See Figure 5-123.

Figure 5-123

Step 2 Draw an area.

In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.

Click

The monitoring screen to configure the abandoned rules is displayed. See Figure 5-124.

3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See Table 5-39.

Parameter	Description
Name	Enter the customized rule name.
Period	Configure the minimum time period for activating alarms by detecting the abandoned objects.

	Click fad to draw areas to filter the target
	CQ NOTE
Filtering Target	You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and
Filtering Target	minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is
	smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,
	no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger
	than the minimum size.

Table 5-39

Drag to draw an area.
Click Save to save the settings.

Step 3 Click

to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see “5.10.2.1 Configuring

Tripwire Rules.”

Step 4 Select the Enable check box, and then click Apply.

The abandoned object detecting function is active. When the object is placed in the defined detection area for more than the set time, the system activates alarms.

5.10.2.4 Configuring Missing Rules

When the target is taken away from the defined area exceeds the set time, the system activates alarms.

Step 1 On the rule line that you added, in the Type list, select Missing.

The Missing interface is displayed. See Figure 5-125.

Figure 5-125

Step 2 Draw an area.

1) In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure the rules for.

Click

The monitoring screen to configure the missing rules is displayed. See Figure 5126.

Figure 5-126

3) Configure the settings for the parameters of drawing rules. See Table 5-40.

Parameter	Description
Name	Enter the customized rule name.
Period	Configure the minimum time period for activating alarms by detecting the missing objects.
	Click to draw areas to filter the target. EQ NOTE
Filtering Target	You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and
Filtering Target	minimum size). When the target that is crossing the tripwire is
	smaller than the minimum size or larger than the maximum size,
	no alarms will be activated. The maximum size should be larger
	than the minimum size.

Table 5-40

Drag to draw an area.
Click Save to save the settings.

Click

to set the actions to be triggered. For details, see “5.10.2.1 Configuring

Tripwire Rules.”

Step 3 Select the Enable check box, and then click Apply.

The missing object detecting function is active. When the target is taken away from the defined area exceeds the set time, the system activates alarms.

- 1. Face Detection

You can configure the face detection settings and search the detected faces in the defined time period.

- - 1. Configuring Face Detection Settings

When the Device detects the human faces, the system activates alarms.

CD NOTE

Not all models support this function.
Smart IPC must be equipped with face detect function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Intelligent^ Face Detect ^ Parameters.

The Human Face interface is displayed. See Figure 5-127.

Step 2 Configure the settings for the face detection parameters. See Table 5-41.

Parameter	Description
Channel	In the Channel list, select a channel to set the face detection.
	Click Setting to draw areas to filter the target. CD NOTE
Target Filter	You can configure two filtering targets (maximum size and
Target Filter	minimum size). When the target is smaller than the minimum size
	or larger than the maximum size, no alarms will be activated. The
	maximum size should be larger than the minimum size.
Enable	Enable or disable the face detection function.
Period	Define a period during which the motion detection is active.
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. Enable alarm activation function. Select the alarm output port(s) to which the peripheral alarm devices are connected. When an alarm event occurs, the system activates the peripheral alarm devices connected to the selected output port.

Parameter	Description
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Send Email	Select the Send Email check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. CD NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
	Main Menu ■> Network •+ EMAIL.
Record Channel	Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs. CD NOTE
Record Channel	The recording for intelligence event and auto recording function
	must be enabled. For details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded
	Video Storage Schedule” and “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.‘
PTZ	Click Setting to display the PTZ interface. Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs. CD NOTE
	Motion Detect can only activate PTZ preset.
Post Record	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
	Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. ED NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the following settings are
Snapshot	configured:
	•	The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in
		Main Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot.
	•	Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot, in
		the Mode list, select Event.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log	Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a human face detection event.

Table 5-41

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Searching for Detected Faces

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^Video^ Intelligent Play^ Smart Search.

The SMART SEARCH interface is displayed.See Figure 5-128.

Figure 5-128

Step 2 In the Begin Time box and End Time box, enter the time.

Step 3 Click Search.

The faces searched in the defined period display. See Figure 5-129.

Figure 5-129

- 1. System Events

You can configure the alarm output for three types of system event (HDD, Network, and User). When there is an abnormal system event occurs, the system activates alarms in the way that you configure in this section.

- - 1. Configuring HDD Event Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Events Abnormity > HDD.

The HDD interface is displayed.See Figure 5-130.

Figure 5-130

Step 2 Configure the settings for the HDD event. See Table 5-42.

Parameter	Description
Event Type	In the Event Type list, select No HDD, HDD Error, or HDD No Space as the event type.
Enable	Enable or disable the HDD event detection function.
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Show Message	Select the Show Message check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Alarm Upload	Select the Alarm Upload check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email	Select the Send Email check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. CQ NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
	Menu ^ NETWORK ^ EMAIL.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log	Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a HDD alarm event.

Table 5-42

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring Network Event Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Event ^ Abnormity ^ Network.

The Network interface is displayed.See Figure 5-131.

Figure 5-131

Step 2 Configure the settings for the Network event. See Table 5-43.

Parameter	Description
Event Type	In the Event Type list, select Net Disconnection, IP Conflicted, or MAC Conflicted as the event type.
Enable	Enable or disable the Network event detection function.
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Show Message	Select the Show Message check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Send Email	Select the Send Email check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. CQ NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
	Menu ^ Network ^ Email.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log	Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.

Parameter	Description
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a network alarm event.

Table 5-43

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring User Event Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Event ^ Abnormity ^ User.

The User interface is displayed.See Figure 5-132.

Figure 5-132

Step 2 Configure the settings for the User event. See Table 5-44.

Parameter	Description
Event Type	In the Event Type list, select Illegal Login.
Enable	Enable the user error detection function. If you do not enable this function, there will be no limit for wrong password entry and the account cannot be locked because of the wrong password.
Attempt(s)	Set the maximum number of allowable wrong password entries. The account will be locked after your entries exceed the maximum number.
Lock Time	Set how long the account is locked for. The value ranges from 1 minute to 60 minutes.
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.

Parameter	Description
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Send Email	Select the Send Email check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. 1’H NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
	Menu ^ Network ^ Email.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log	Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a user account alarm event.

Table 5-44

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring Device Event Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Event ^ Abnormity > Device.

The Device interface is displayed.See Figure 5-133.

Figure 5-133

Step 2 Configure the settings for the device event. See Table 5-45.

Parameter	Description
Event Type	In the Event Type list, select High Temperature or Fan Speed Abnormal.
Alarm Name	Enter the name for the event type.
Enable	Enable the device event detection function.

Parameter	Description
Max Temperature	In the Max Temperature box, enter the max temperature value.
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Send Email	Select the Send Email check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
	Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log	Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a Device alarm event.

Table 5-45

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- 1. Alarm Input Settings

Connect the alarm input and output ports by referring to “4.3 Connecting to Alarm Input and Output.” You can configure the alarm settings for each channel individually or apply the settings to all channels and then save the settings.

- - 1. Configuring Local Alarms

You can connect the alarm device to the alarm input port of the Device. When the alarm is activated on the alarm device, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device outputs the local alarms in the way that you configure in this section.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Events ALARM INPUT ■> Local.

The Local interface is displayed.See Figure 5-134.

Figure 5-134

Step 2 Configure the settings for the local alarms. See Table 5-46.

Parameter

Description

Alarm In	Select the channel number.
Alarm Name	Enter the customized alarm name.
Enable	Enable or disable the local alarm function.
Type	In the Type list, select NO or select NC as the voltage output type.
Period	Click Setting to display setting interface. Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see “Setting Motion Detection Period” section in “5.10.1.1 Configuring Motion Detect Settings.“
Anti-Dither	Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 600 seconds.
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Show Message	Select the Show Message check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC.
Alarm Upload	Select the Alarm Upload check box to enable the system to upload the alarm signal to the network (including alarm center) when an alarm event occurs.

Parameter	Description
	Select the Send Email check box to enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs.
Send Email	EQ NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
	Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL.
	Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs.
Record Channel	EQ NOTE
Record Channel	The recording for alarm and auto snapshot must be enabled. For
	details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule”
	and “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.“
	Click Setting to display the PTZ interface.
PTZ	Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after
Post Record	the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
	Select the Tour check box to enable a tour of the selected channels.
Tour	EQ NOTE
Tour	To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured in
	Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR.
	Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel.
	EQ NOTE
Snapshot	To use this function, make sure the following settings are configured:
Snapshot	• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in Main
	Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot.
	• Select Main Menu ■+ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot, in the
	Mode list, select Event.
	Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event
	occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in “Main
Video Matrix	Menu ^ Display ■+ TOUR.”
	EQ NOTE
	Not all models support this function.
Buzzer	Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device.
Log	Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a local alarm event.

Table 5-46

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

EQ NOTE

Click Default to restore the default setting.
Click Copy, in the Copy dialog box, select the additional channel(s) that you want to copy the local alarm settings to, and then click Apply.
- - 1. Configuring Alarms from Alarm Box

You can connect the alarm box to the RS485 port of the Device. When the alarm is detected by the alarm box, the alarm information will be uploaded to the Device, and then the Device outputs the alarms in the way that you configure in this section.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Event^ALARM INPUT ^ Alarm Box.

The Alarm Box interface is displayed.See Figure 5-135

Step 2 In the Alarm Box list, select the alarm box number corresponding to the address number configured by the DIP switch on the Alarm Box.

Step 3 In the Alarm In list, select the alarm input port on the Alarm Box.

Step 4 Configure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box. For details, see Table 546.

Step 5

Click Apply to complete the settings.

Click Default to restore the default setting.

- - 1. Configuring Alarms from External IP Cameras

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Events ALARM INPUT ^ IPC Ext.

The IPC Ext interface is displayed.See Figure 5-136.

Figure 5-136

Step 2 Configure the alarm input settings from the external IPC. For details, see Table 5-46.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Click Default to restore the default setting.
Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.
Click Refresh to refresh configured settings.

5.10.5.4 Configuring Alarms for IP Camera Offline

You can configure the alarm settings for the situation when the IP camera is offline.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Event ^ ALARM INPUT ^ IPC Offline.

The IPC Offline interface is displayed.See Figure 5-137.

Step 2 Configure the alarm input settings from the external IPC. For details, see Table 5-46.

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Q NOTE

Click Default to restore the default setting.
Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

5.10.5.5 Configuring Alarms from External Devices

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^Event^ ALARM INPUT ^ HDCVI Alarm.

The Ext. Alarm interface is displayed.See Figure 5-138.

Figure 5-138

Step 2 In the Channel list, select a channel or all.

Step 3 Click

The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-139.

Figure 5-139

Step 4 Configure the settings for other parameters of the Alarm Box. For details, see Table 546.

Step 5 Click OK to complete the settings.

5.10.6 Alarm Output Settings

When the Device activates alarms, the connected alarm device generates alarms in the way that you can configure in this section. You can connect to the output port of the Device or connect wirelessly.

Auto: When an alarm event is triggered on the Device, the connected alarm device generates alarms.
Manual: The alarm device is forced to keep generating alarms.
Stop: The alarm output function is not enabled.

Step 1 Select Main Menu^ Event ^ ALARM OUTPUT.

The ALARM OUTPUT interface is displayed.See Figure 5-140.

Figure 5-140

Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm output. For details, see Table 5-47 .Table 5-46

Parameter		Description
General Alarm	Alarm Type	Select alarm type for each alarm output port.
General Alarm	Status	Indicates the status of each alarm output port.
Ext. Alarm	Alarm Box	Select the alarm box number corresponding to the address number configured by the DIP switch on the Alarm Box.
	Alarm Type	Select the alarm type for each alarm output ports.
	Status	Indicates the status of each alarm output port.
Alarm Release		Click OK to clear all alarm output status.

Table 5-47

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

5.11 IoT Function

- 1. Configuring Sensor Settings

You can connect external sensors wirelessly through the Device with USB gateway or through connecting to a camera gateway. After connection, you can activate alarm events through external sensors.

- - 1. Connecting Sensor through Device

CD NOTE

Only the Device with USB gateway supports this function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Intelligent^ IoT ^Manager ^ Sensor Pairing.

The Sensor Pairing interface is displayed. See Figure 5-141.

Figure 5-141

Step 2 In the Access Type list, select USB Gateway.

Step 3 Click Add.

The Add interface is displayed. See Figure 5-142.

Figure 5-142

Step 4 Click Pair.

The Device starts pairing with the sensor.

After pairing is completed, see Figure 5-143.

Figure 5-143

Step 5 Click Back to exit the pairing interface.

The added sensor information is displayed. See Figure 5-144. Q NOTE

Click

to modify the sensor name; click

to delete sensor information.

Figure 5-144

- - 1. Connecting Sensor through Camera with Gateway

NOTE

Only the camera with gateway supports this function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Intelligent^ IoT ^ Manager ^ Sensor Pairing.

The Sensor Pairing interface is displayed.See Figure 5-145.

Figure 5-145

Step 2 In the Access Type list, select Camera Gateway.

Step 3 In the Channel list, select the channel that is connected to the camera.

Step 4 Click Add.

The Add interface is displayed. See Figure 5-146.

Figure 5-146

Step 5 Click Pair.

The Device starts pairing with the sensor.

After pairing is completed, see Figure 5-147.

Figure 5-147

Step 6 Click Back to exit the pairing interface.

The added sensor information is displayed. See Figure 5-148. Q NOTE

Click

to modify the sensor name; click

to delete sensor information.

Figure 5-148

5.11.1.3 Configuring Alarm Linkage

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Intelligent^ IoT ^ Manager ^ Wireless Detector.

The Wireless Detector interface is displayed.See Figure 5-149.

Step 2 In the Access Type list, select USB, Camera, or All.

Step 3 Click

The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-139.

Figure 5-150

Step 4 Configure the settings for alarm linkage. For details, see Table 5-48.

Parameter	Description
Name	Enter the customized alarm name.
Period	Click Setting to display setting interface. Define a period during which the motion detection is active. For details, see “Setting Motion Detection Period” section in “5.10.1.1 Configuring Motion Detect Settings.“
PTZ	Click Setting to display the PTZ interface. Enable PTZ activation function. For each PTZ camera, select the preset that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Post Record	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Anti-Dither	Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 600 seconds.

Parameter	Description
Record Channel	Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm event occurs. CQ NOTE
Record Channel	The recording for alarm and auto snapshot must be enabled. For
	details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule”
	and “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.“
	Select the Snapshot check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. CD NOTE
Snapshot	To use this function, make sure the following settings are configured:
Snapshot	• The snapshot function is enabled for motion detect alarms in Main
	Menu ^ Storage ^ Schedule ^ Snapshot.
	• Select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot, in the
	Mode list, select Event.
Tour	Select the Tour check box to enable a tour of the selected channels. nn. note
Tour	To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured in
	Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a local alarm event.
More Setting	Show Message: Select the Show Message check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC. Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device. Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in “Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR.” CQ NOTE
More Setting	Not all models support this function. • Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. CQ NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in Main
	Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL. • Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log

Table 5-48

Step 5 Click OK to save the settings.

Step 6 On the Wireless Detector interface, click Apply to complete the settings.

- 1. Configuring Temperature and Humidity Camera

You can view, search and export the temperature and humidity data of camera with such sensors and configure the alarm event settings.

To use this function, please make sure there is at least one camera with temperature and humidity sensor has been connected to the Device.

- - 1. Enabling Detecting Function

You should enable the IoT function the first time when you enter this interface.

Step 1 On the main menu^Intelligent, click loT ^ Manager ^ Temperature/Humidity.

The Temperature/Humidity interface is displayed. See Figure 5-151.

Figure 5-151

Step 2 Select the Enable check boxes to enable IoT function. See Figure 5-152.

REALTIME DISPLAY

SEARCH INFO

> MANAGER

Tempraturev^u- Wirde» Detector VrSrdc» Siren

2	Enable	Setting	Access Point	l?Pi	Detect PosOon Nam
1		a	Ch»6	Ternipaatiire	Chn6 Temperature

Sçnjçr Piiirmg

Figure 5-152

The Device starts detecting the temperature and humidity data from the camera and display on the Realtime Display interface.

- - 1. Viewing Temperature and Humidity Data

You can view the temperature and humidity data on the Realtime Display interface after the IoT function is enabled.

In the Refresh Interval box, select data refresh interval. For example, you can select 5 Sec.

You can also display the temperature and humidity data in graphical way by selecting the Display Graph check box to. See Figure 5-153 for humidity data in graphical way.

> REALTIME DISPLAY

SEARCH INFO

MANAGER

r+eh’«fi interval

5Sk

tiifXay Gras*

Accth Rani dm 6

tn*

Trtfnpcf dlijf f

Oawcr Roa bon Na*ii Chnfi-lenipcf alurc-1

Curr enl Vai u are

dify

Ghnfrltaiirftï 1

* m

Témçièr Mui fr Ciiarl Humdiity Chart

C*e»f

Figure 5-153

Click Clear to delete the data.

- - 1. Exporting Temperature and Humidity Data

You can export the temperature and humidity data in .BMP format. Take exporting humidity data as an example.

Step 1 Prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.

Step 2 On the Realtime Display interface, click the Humidity tab. See Figure 5-154

Figure 5-154

Step 3 Click Locked to lock the data.

The export button is enabled.

Step 4 Click Export. The system starts exporting the data.

After exporting is finished, a Message dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK.

You can find the exported data on your USB device.

- - 1. Configuring Alarm Linkage

You can configure alarm linkage settings for temperature and humidity data.

- - - 1. Configuring Alarm Linkage for Temperature Data

Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click IoT ^ Manager ^ Temperature/Humidity. The Temperature/Humidity interface is displayed. See Figure 5-155.

REALTIME DISPLAY

SEARCH INFO

> MANAGER

Tempraturev^u- Wirde» Detector VrSrdc» Siren

2	Enable	Setting	Access Point	W	Delect Position Nam
1		a	Ch»6	Tern ¡para Cure	Chn6 Temperature

Sçnjçr Pairing

Figure 5-155

Step 2 On the temperature information line, click

The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-156.

Figure 5-156

Step 3 Configure the settings for alarm linkage. See Table 5-49.

Parameter	Description
Access Point	Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Type	Temperature by default.
Detect Position Name	Set the detect position name.

Parameter	Description
Preview Channel	Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of access point or any other channels according to your actual situation.
Event Type	Select event type as High or Low, and set the upper and low temperature limit respectively. For example, select event type as High and set upper limit as 28, the alarm occurs when the temperature reaches 28 (‘.
Upper Limit
Enable	Enable the alarm function.
Period	Define a period during which the alarm setting is active. For more information about setting the period, see “5.10.1.1 Configuring Motion Detect Settings.“
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
PTZ	Enable PTZ activation function. Click Setting to display the PTZ interface. For each PTZ camera, select the preset, tour, or pattern that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Post Record	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Anti-Dither	Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.
Snapshot	Select the check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. CD NOTE To use this function, make sure the snapshot is enabled motion detect alarms in Main Menu ■+ Storage ■+ Schedule ■+ Snapshot.
Record CH	Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs. CD NOTE The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule” and “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.“

Parameter	Description
Tour	Select the check box to enable a tour of the selected channels. CP NOTE
Tour	To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured
	in Main Menu ^ Display •+ TOUR.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a temperature alarm event.
More Setting	Show Message: Select the Show Message check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC. Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device. Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in “Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR.” CP NOTE
More Setting	Not all models support this function. • Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. CP NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
	Main Menu ■> Network •+ EMAIL. • Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log

Table 5-49

Step 4 Click Save to save the settings.

- - - 1. Configuring Alarm Settings for Humidity Data

You can configure the alarm event by setting the humidity data.

Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click IoT ■+ Manager ^ Temperature/Humidity.

The Temperature/Humidity interface is displayed. See Figure 5-157.

REALTIME DISPLAY

SEARCH INFO

> MANAGER

Senser Pairing

Tempratu rcAI u_

Wirde» Detector

Wir el ess Siren

2 1

E natte

Sating

Accession!

Chn6

Temperature

Deled Position Nam Chn6-Temperature

Figure 5-157

Step 2 On the humidity information line, click

The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-158.

Figure 5-158

Step 3 Configure the settings for the following parameters. See Table 5-50.

Parameter	Description
Access Point	Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Type	Humidity by default.
Detect Position Name	Set the detect position name.

Parameter	Description
Preview Channel	Select the channel that you want to preview to help monitor the channel of access point. This channel could be the channel of access point or any other channels according to your actual situation.
Event Type	Select event type as High Humidity or Low Humidity, and set the upper and low humidity limit respectively. For example, select event type as High Humidity and set upper limit as 60, the alarm occurs when the humidity reaches 60%RH.
Upper Limit
Enable	Enable the alarm function.
Period	Define a period during which the alarm setting is active. For more information about setting the period, see “5.10.1.1 Configuring Motion Detect Settings.“
Alarm Out	Click Setting to display setting interface. General Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the alarm devices connected to the selected output port. External Alarm: Enable alarm activation through the connected alarm box. Wireless Siren: Enable alarm activation through devices connected by USB gateway or camera gateway.
PTZ	Enable PTZ activation function. Click Setting to display the PTZ interface. For each PTZ camera, select the preset, tour, or pattern that you want to be called when an alarm event occurs.
Latch	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off alarm after the external alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 0 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds. If you enter 0, there will be no delay.
Post Record	Set a length of time for the Device to delay turning off recording after the alarm is cancelled. The value ranges from 10 seconds to 300 seconds, and the default value is 10 seconds.
Anti-Dither	Configure the event detection lasting time. The system records only one event during this period. The value ranges from 5 seconds to 300 seconds.
Snapshot	Select the check box to take a snapshot of the selected channel. CD NOTE To use this function, make sure the snapshot is enabled motion detect alarms in Main Menu ■+ Storage ■+ Schedule ■+ Snapshot.
Record CH	Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs. CD NOTE The recording for IoT alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule” and “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.“

Parameter	Description
Tour	Select the check box to enable a tour of the selected channels. CP NOTE
Tour	To use this function, make sure the tour is enabled and configured
	in Main Menu ^ Display •+ TOUR.
Voice Prompts	Select to enable audio broadcast/voice prompts in response to a temperature alarm event.
More Setting	Show Message: Select the Show Message check box to enable a pop-up message in your local host PC. Buzzer: Select the check box to activate a buzzer noise at the Device. Video Matrix: Select the check box to enable the function. When an alarm event occurs, the video output port outputs the settings configured in “Main Menu ^ Display ^ TOUR.” CP NOTE
More Setting	Not all models support this function. • Send Email: Enable the system to send an email notification when an alarm event occurs. CP NOTE
	To use this function, make sure the email function is enabled in
	Main Menu ■> Network •+ EMAIL. • Log: Select the check box to enable the Device to record a local alarm log

Table 5-50

Step 4 Click Save to save the settings.

- - 1. Searching IoT Information

You can search and backup all your IoT data.

To back up the data, you should prepare a USB device and plug it into the Device.

Step 1 On the main interface of Intelligent, click IoT ^ SEARCH INFO. See Figure 5-159.

Figure 5-159

Step 2 Configure the parameters settings. See Table 5-51.

Parameter	Description
Access Point	Indicates the channel that the camera is connected to.
Display Type	In the Display Type list, select List or Graph.
Type	Select the information type that you want to search. You can select Humidity or Temperature.
Status	Select the information state that you want to search. This option is available when you select List in the Display Type list.
Start Time End Time	Enter the start time and end time for the information that you want to search.

Table 5-51

Step 3 Click Search. The system starts search according to your parameters settings.

After searching is finished, the result displays.

For the data displayed in list, see Figure 5-160.

NOTE

Click Go To to switch result pages.

	1			UM
	All			M
wtTwne	2017 11 06	00:0000 E		2017-12-06 00 00 00
				Search
120	lime	Accew Pant	Type	Detect Paaton Name •
	MI-0721 13 58	Ovi t		Ctmt liznwStv 1
				*
4 201	1 1147 21 14 00 M147 71 14 09 MI-0721 14 10 Mt 47 21 14 14 Mi-07 21 14 23 F It 0721 1004 1 11 07 21.16 07 MI-0721 10 17 Ml 47 21 16 26 MI-07 21 16 77 1-1147 21 16 36		*Kimaty**	•
1/	85 > » 1	Go To		Backup

Figure 5-160

For the data displayed in graph, see Figure 5-161.

> SEARCI

Humodit/

Stall Ti

2017-11-06 00:00.00′

Cbnl HuMiny 1

Figure 5-161

Step 4 Click Backup. The system starts exporting the data.

After exporting is finished, a Message dialog box is displayed.

Step 5 Click OK.

You can find the exported data on your USB device.

5.11.3 Configuring Wireless Siren

You can connect the wireless siren to the Device, when there is an alarm event activated on the Device, the wireless siren generates alarms.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Intelligent ^ IoT > Manager > Wireless Siren.

The Wireless Siren interface is displayed.See Figure 5-16 2Figure 5-140.

Figure 5-162

Step 2 Configure the settings for the wireless alarm output. For details, see Table 5-52 .Table

5-46

Parameter

Description

USB Gateway, Camera Gateway

Auto: Automatically activate alarm if the alarm output function

for wireless siren is enabled for specific events. For example, if you want to enable the alarm output through wireless siren for motion detection, see “Alarm Output” parameter in Table 534.

Manual: Activate alarm immediately.
Stop: Do not activate alarm.

Alarm Release

Click OK to clear all alarm output status of wireless siren.

Table 5-52

Step 3 Click Apply to save the settings.

1. Configuring POS Settings

You can connect the Device to the POS (Point of Sale) machine and receive the information from it. This function applies to the scenarios such as supermarket POS machine. After connection is established, the Device can access the POS information and display the overlaid text in the channel window.

CD NOTE

Playing POS information in the local playback and viewing the POS information in the live view screen only support single-channel mode. Displaying monitoring screen and playing back in the web support multi-channel mode.

- 1. Searching the Transaction Records

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Intelligent •+ POS ^ POS SEARCH.

The POS SEARCH interface is displayed.See Figure 5-163.

Figure 5-163

Step 2 In the Transaction No. list, enter the transaction number on your receipt printed out by POS machine.

Step 3 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period that you want to search the POS transaction information.

Step 4 Click Search.

The searched transaction results display in the table.

- 1. Configuring POS Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■+ Intelligent^ POS ^ POS SETUP.

The POS SETUP interface is displayed.See Figure 5-164.

Figure 5-164

Step 2 Configure the settings for the POS parameters. See Table 5-53.

Parameter	Description
POS Name	In the POS Name list, select the POS machine that you want to configure settings for. Click ^3 to modify the POS name. CQ NOTE The POS name supports 21 Chinese characters or 63 English characters.
Enable	Enable the POS function.
Record CH	Select the channel(s) that you want to record. The selected channel(s) starts recording after an alarm occurs. CQ NOTE The recording for POS alarms and auto recording function must be enabled. For details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule” and “5.9.1 Enabling Record Control.“
Privacy Setup	Enter the privacy content.
Protocol Type	Select POS by default. Different machine corresponds to different protocol.
Connect Type	In the Connect Type list, select the connection protocol type. Click ^3, the IP Address interface is displayed. In the Source IP box, enter the IP address (the machine that is connected to the Device) that sends messages.
Convert	Select a character encoding mode.
Overlay	In the Overlay list, Select Turn or ROLL.
Network time out	When the network is not working correctly and cannot be recovered after the entered timeout limit, the POS information will not display normally. After the network is recovered, the latest POS information will be displayed.
Time Display	Enter the time that how long you want to keep the POS information displaying. For example, enter 5, the POS information disappear from the screen after 5 seconds.
Font Size	In the Font Size list, select Small, Medium, or Big as the text size of POS information
COLOR	In the color bar, click to select the color for the text size of POS information.
POS Info	Enable the POS Info function, the POS information displays in the live view screen.
Transaction Start	Enter the transaction start character and end character.
Transaction End	Enter the transaction start character and end character.
Line Delimiter	Enter the line delimiter that you want to use.

Table 5-53

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

1. Configuring Backup Settings

- 1. Finding USB Device

When you inset a USB storage device into the USB port of the Device, the Device detects the USB storage device and pops up “Find USB device” interface, which provides you a shortcut to perform backup and upgrading operations. See Figure 5-165.

For details, see “5.13.2 Backing up Files”, “5.19.2 Viewing Log Information”, “5.18.5 Exporting and Importing System Settings”, and “5.18.7 Upgrading the Device.”

Figure 5-165

- 1. Backing up Files

You can back up the recorded videos and snapshots.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ BACKUP.

The BACKUP interface is displayed.See Figure 5-166.

Figure 5-166

Step 2 Configure the settings for the backup parameters. See Table 5-54.

Parameter	Description
Device Name	In the Device Name list, select the device that you want to back up the files to.
Format	Click Format to format the selected device.
Path	Click Browse, the Browse interface is displayed. Select the route where you want to search for the files.
Record CH	In the Record CH list, select the channel where you want to search for the files.
Type	In the Type list, select the file type that you want to search.
Start Time End Time	Enter the start time and end time for the files that you want to search.
File Format	In the File Format list, select the file format that you want to search.

Table 5-54

Step 3 Click Search to search the files that meet the configured settings.

The searched results will display in the table.

Step 4 Select the files that you want to back up.

Step 5 Click Backup to back up the selected files to the configured path. Q NOTE

Click Clear to remove all the searched results.

1. Network Management

- 1. Configuring Network Settings

You can ensure the network interworking between the Device and other devices through configuring the network settings.

- - 1. Configuring TCP/IP Settings

You can configure the settings for the Device such as IP address, DNS according to the networking plan.

Select Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP, the TCP/IP interface is displayed. See Figure 5-167.

For details about parameter settings, see “5.1.4.4 Configuring Network Settings.”

Figure 5-167

- - 1. Configuring Port Settings

You can configure the maximum connection accessing the Device from Client such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone and configure each port settings.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Network ^ CONNECTION.

The CONNECTION interface is displayed.See Figure 5-168.

Figure 5-168

Step 2 Configure the settings for the connection parameters. See Table 5-55. Q2 NOTE

The connection parameters except Max Connection cannot take effects until the Device has been restarted.

Parameter	Description
Max Connection	The allowable maximum clients accessing the Device at the same time, such as WEB, Platform, and Mobile Phone. Select a value between 1 and 128. The default value setting is 128.
TCP Port	The default value setting is 25001. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
UDP Port	The default value setting is 25002. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
HTTP Port	The default value setting is 80. You can enter the value according to your actual situation. If you enter other value, for example, 70, and then you should enter 70 after the IP address when logging in the Device by browser.
RTSP Port	The default value setting is 554. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
POS Port	Data transmission. The value range is from 1 through 65535. The default value is 38800.
HTTPS Enable	Enable HTTPS.
HTTPS Port	HTTPS communication port. The default value setting is 443. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.

Table 5-55

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring Wi-Fi Connection Settings

You can make wireless connection between the Device and the other devices in the same network through Wi-Fi settings, facilitating the devices connection and mobility.

NOTE

Only the Device with Wi-Fi module supports this function.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Network ■> Wi-Fi.

The Wi-Fi interface is displayed.See Figure 5-169.

Figure 5-169

Step 2 Configure the settings for the Wi-Fi connection parameters. See Table 5-56.

Parameter	Description
Wi-Fi Auto Connect	Enable Wi-Fi Auto Connect. After the Device is restarted, it will automatically connect to the nearest hotspot that had been connected successfully.
Refresh	Refresh the hotspot list. The self-adaption function such as adding password is supported if such setting was once configured.
Connect	In the hotpots list, select a hotspot, and then click Connect. To reconnect the same hotspot, disconnect first and then reconnect. To connect to other hotspot, disconnect from the current connected hotspot first, and then connect to the other hotspot.
Disconnect	To disconnect from a hotspot, click Disconnect.

Table 5-56

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

After the Device is connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot, in the Wi-Fi Working Info area, the current hotspot, IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are displayed.

- - 1. Configuring PPPoE Settings

PPPoE is another way for the Device to access the network. You can establish network connection by configuring PPPoE settings to give the Device a dynamic IP address in the WAN. To use this function, firstly you need to obtain the user name and password from the Internet Service Provider.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Network ^ PPPoE.

The PPPoE interface is displayed. See Figure 5-170.

Figure 5-170

Step 2 Enable the PPPoE function.

Step 3 In the User Name box and Password box, enter the user name and password accordingly provided by the Internet Service Provider.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

The system pops up a message to indicate the successfully saved. The IP address appears on the PPPoE interface. You can use this IP address to access the Device. CD NOTE

When the PPPoE function is enabled, the IP address on the TCP/IP interface cannot be modified.

- - 1. Configuring DDNS Settings

When the IP address of the Device changes frequently, the DDNS function can dynamically refresh the correspondence between the domain on DNS and the IP address, ensuring you access the Device by using the domain.

Preparing for Configuration

Please confirm if the Device supports the DDNS Type and log in the website provided by the DDNS service provider to register the information such as domain from PC located in the WAN.

If DDNS belongs to Quick DDNS type, domain registration is not needed.
If DDNS belongs to other type, you need to login the DDNS website to register the information such as user name, password, and domain name.

CD NOTE

After you have registered and logged in the DDNS website successfully, you can view the information of all the connected devices under this user name.

Configuring Steps

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Network ^ DDNS.

The DDNS interface is displayed. See Figure 5-171.

Figure 5-171

Step 2 Configure the settings for the DDNS parameters. • DDNS type. See Table 5-57.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the DDNS function.
DDNS Type	Type and address of DDNS service provider. Type: CP Plus DDNS Free Type: Dyndns DDNS; address: members.dyndns.org Type: NO-IP DDNS; address: dynupdate.no-ip.com
Host IP
Domain Name	The domain name for registering on the website of DDNS service provider.
User Name	Enter the user name and password obtained from DDNS service provider. You need to register (including user name and password) on the website of DDNS service provider.
Password
Interval	Enter the amount of time that you want to update the DDNS.

Table 5-57

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Enter the domain name in the browser on your PC, and then press Enter.

If the web interface of the Device is displayed, the configuration is successful. If not, the configuration is failed.

- - 1. Configuring EMAIL Settings

You can configure the email settings to enable the system to send the email as a notification when there is an alarm event occurs.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Network ^ EMAIL.

The EMAIL interface is displayed.See Figure 5-172.

Step 2 Configure the settings for the email parameters. See Table 5-58.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the email function.
SMTP Server	Enter the address of SMTP server of sender’s email account.
Port	Enter the port value of SMTP server. The default value setting is 25. You can enter the value according to your actual situation.
User Name	Enter the user name and password of sender’s email account.
Password	Enter the user name and password of sender’s email account.
Anonymity	If enable the anonymity function, you can login as anonymity.
Mail Receiver	In the Mail Receiver list, select the number of receiver that you want to receive the notification. The Device supports up to three mail receivers.
Email Address	Enter the email address of mail receiver(s).
Sender	Enter the sender’s email address. It supports maximum three senders separated by comma.
Title	Enter the email subject. Supports Chinese, English and Arabic numerals. It supports maximum 64 characters.
Attachment	Enable the attachment function. When there is an alarm event, the system can attach snapshots as an attachment to the email.
Authentication	Select the encryption type: NONE, SSL, or TLS.
Interval (Sec.)	This is the interval that the system sends an email for the same type of alarm event, which means, the system does not send an email upon any alarm event. This setting helps to avoid the large amount of emails caused by frequent alarm events. The value ranges from 0 to 3600. 0 means that there is no interval.
Health Enable	Enable the health test function. The system can send a test email to check the connection.
Interval (Min.)	This is the interval that the system sends a health test email. The value ranges from 30 to 1440. 0 means that there is no interval.
Test	Click Test to test the email sending function. If the configuration is correct, the receiver’s email account will receive the email. Cfl NOTE Before testing, click Apply to save the settings.

Table 5-58

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring UPnP Settings

You can map the relationship between the LAN and the WAN to access the Device on the LAN through the IP address on the WAN.

Preparation for Configuration

Login the router to set the WAN port to enable the IP address to connect into the WAN.
Enable the UPnP function at the router.
Connect the Device with the LAN port on the router to connect into the LAN.
Select Main Menu ^ Network ^ TCP/IP, configure the IP address into the router IP

address range, or enable the DHCP function to obtain an IP address automatically.

Configuration Steps

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Network ^ UPnP.

The UPnP interface is displayed.See Figure 5-173.

Figure 5-173

Step 2 Configure the settings for the UPnP parameters. See Table 5-59.

Parameter	Description
PAT	Enable the UPnP function.
Status	Indicates the status of UPnP function. * Offline: Failed. • Online: Succeeded.
LAN IP	Enter IP address of router on the LAN. Cfl NOTE
LAN IP	After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address
	automatically without performing any configurations.
WAN IP	Enter IP address of router on the WAN. LJ NOTE
WAN IP	After mapping succeeded, the system obtains IP address
	automatically without performing any configurations.
	The settings in PAT table correspond to the UPnP PAT table on the router. Service Name: Name of network server. Protocol: Type of protocol. Int. Port: Internal port that is mapped on the Device. Ext. Port: External port that is mapped on the router. Wl NOTE
	•	To avoid the conflict, when setting the external port, try to use
		the ports from 1024 through 5000 and avoid popular ports
PAT Table		from 1 through 255 and system ports from 256 through 1023.
	•	When there are several devices in the LAN, please
		reasonably arrange the ports mapping to avoid mapping to the same external port.
	•	When establishing a mapping relationship, please ensure the
		mapping ports are not occupied or limited.
	•	The internal and external ports of TCP and UDP must be the
		same and cannot be modified.
	•	Click ^3 to modify the external port.

Table 5-59

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

In the browser, enter http://WAN IP: External IP port. You can visit the LAN Device.

- - 1. Configuring SNMP Settings

. . NOTE

Not all models support this function.

You can connect the Device with some software such as MIB Builder and MG-SOFT MIB Browser to manage and control the Device from the software.

Preparation for Configuration

Install the software that can manage and control the SNMP, such as MIB Builder and MGSOFT MIB Browser
Obtain the MIB files that correspond to the current version from the technical support.

Configuration Steps

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Network ^ SNMP.

The SNMP interface is displayed. See Figure 5-174.

Figure 5-174

Step 2 Configure the settings for the SNMP parameters. See Table 5-60.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the SNMP function.
Version	Select the check box of SNMP version(s) that you are using.
SNMP Port	Indicates the monitoring port on the agent program.
Read Community	Indicates the read/write strings supported by the agent program.
Write Community
Trap Address	Indicates the destination address for the agent program to send the Trap information.
Trap Port	Indicates the destination port for the agent program to send the Trap information.

Table 5-60

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Compile the two MIB files by MIB Builder.

Run MG-SOFT MIB Browser to load in the module from compilation.

On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, enter the Device IP that you want to manage, and
then select the version number to query.

On the MG-SOFT MIB Browser, unfold the tree-structured directory to obtain the
configurations of the Device, such as the channels quantity and software version.

- - 1. Configuring Multicast Settings

When you access the Device from the network to view the video, if the access is exceeded, the video will not display. You can use the multicast function to group the IP to solve the problem.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Network ^ MULTICAST.

The MULTICAST interface is displayed.See Figure 5-175.

Step 2 Configure the settings for the multicast parameters. See Table 5-61.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the multicast function.
IP Address	Enter the IP address that you want to use as the multicast IP. The IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.
Port	Enter the port for the multicast. The port ranges from 1025 through 65000.

Table 5-61

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

You can use the multicast IP address to login the web. See Figure 5-176.

On the web login dialog box, in the Type list, select MULTICAST. The web will automatically obtain the multicast IP address and join. Then you can view the video through multicast function.

Figure 5-176

- - 1. Configuring Register Settings

You can register the Device into the specified proxy server which acts as the transit to make it easier for the client software to access the Device.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Network ^ REGISTER.

The REGISTER interface is displayed.See Figure 5-177.

Figure 5-177

Step 2 Configure the settings for the register parameters. See Table 5-62.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the register function.
No.	Select a number.
Server IP Address	Enter the server IP address or the server domain that you want to register to.
Port	Enter the port of the server.
Sub Service ID	This ID is allocated by the server and used for the Device.

Table 5-62

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring Alarm Center Settings

You can configure the alarm center server to receive the uploaded alarm information. To use this function, the Alarm Upload check box must be selected. For details about alarm event settings, see “5.10 Alarm Events Settings.”

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Network ^ ALARM CENTER.

The ALARM CENTER interface is displayed.See Figure 5-178.

Figure 5-178

Step 2 Configure the settings for the alarm center parameters. See Table 5-63.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the alarm center function.
Protocol Type	In the Protocol Type list, select protocol type. The default is ALARM CENTER.
Host IP Port	The IP address and communication port of the PC installed with alarm client.
Self-Report Time	In the Self-Report Time list, select time cycle and specific time for uploading alarm.

Table 5-63

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Configuring InstaOn Cloud Settings

You can manage the devices by using InstaOn technology to download the application and register the devices. For details, see “5.1.4.5 Configuring InstaOn Settings.”

- 1. Configuring Network Testing Settings
    1. Testing the Network

You can test the network connection status between the Device and other devices.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> INFO ^ Network ^ Test.

The Test interface is displayed. See Figure 5-179.

Figure 5-179

Step 2 In the Destination IP box, enter the IP address.

Step 3 Click Test.

After testing is completed, the test result is displayed. You can check the evaluation for average delay, packet loss, and network status. See Figure 5-180.

Figure 5-180

- - 1. Capturing Packet and Backing up

Packet capture means the operations such as capturing, resending, and editing data that are sent and received during network transmission. When there is network abnormality, you can perform packet capturing and back up into the USB storage device. This date can be provided to the technical support for analyzing the network condition.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Info ^ Network > Network Test.

The Network Test interface is displayed.See Figure 5-181.

Figure 5-181

Step 2 Connect a USB storage device to the Device.

Step 3 Click Fresh.

The Device starts detecting the USB storage device and displays its name in the Device Name box.

Step 4 Select the route of the data that you want to capture and back up.

1) In the Network Sniffer Packet Backup, click Browse.

The Browse interface is displayed. See Figure 5-182.

Device Name

Total Space

Free Space

Address

sdal(USBUSB) Refresh Format

3.73 GB

3.27 GB

Name	Size	Type	Delete
■ ScreenShot		Folder	B
® LANl-20180313213059.pcap	111.7 KB	File	a
® LANl-20180313213722.pcap	182.1 KB	Rie	□
■ printf_20180314111548.txt	1.2 KB	Rie	fl
a kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt	19.8 KB	File	□
® printf.txt	1.97 MB	Rie	Q
l&l kmsg_printf.txt	1.1KB	Rie	fl
@1 pnntf_2O18O3161539O3.txt	964 B	File	fl
SI kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt	2L2KB	Rie	B
W pnntf_20180316154049.txt	1.5 KB	Rie	fl
® kmsg_printf_201803161S4049.txt	21.7 KB	Rie	g
@1 printf_2O18O316155148.txt	2.2 KB	Rie	fl
Ml kmsg_phntf_20180316155148.txt	21.6 KB	Rie	fl
® printf_2O18O316161436.txt	2.5 KB	File	fl
Bl kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt	21.9 KB	Rie	a

New Folder

Import

Export

Figure 5-182

Select the route.

ED NOTE

If there are several USB storage devices are connected to the Device, you can select from the Device Name list.
Click Refresh to total space, free space and the file list in the selected USB storage device.
In the case of insufficient capacity, click Fl

to delete the needless files.

Click New Folder to create a new folder in the USB storage device.

3) Click Apply to save the route selection settings.

The Test interface is displayed again.

Step 5

Click

to start packet capturing and backing up.

CO NOTE

Only the data packet of one LAN can be captured at one time.
After capturing starts, you can exit the Test interface to perform other operations

such as web login and monitoring.

Step6 Click © to stop capturing.

The backup data is saved in the selected route under the naming style “LAN name- time.pcap.” See Figure 5-183. You can open it by using Wireshark software.

Device Name

Total Space

Free Space

Address

sdal(USBUSB) Refresh Format

3.73 GB

3.27 GB

Name	Size	Type	Delete
■ ScreenShot		Folder	Q
® LANl-20180313213059.pcap	111.7 KB	Rte	B
@ LAN 1-20180313213722.pcap	182.1 KB	Rie	B
;i‘i printf_20180314111548.txt	1 2 KB	Rie
@ kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt	19.8 KB	File	o
g) printf.txt	1.97 MB	Rie	B
I«l kmsg_printf.txt	1.1KB	Rie	*
H pnntf_20180316153903.txt	964 B	File	Sk
(£i kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt	2L2KB	Rie	□
M printf_20180316154049.txt	1.5 KB	Rie	M
IB kmsg_printf_20180316154049.txt	2L7KB	Rie	B
® printf_20180316155148.txt	22 KB	Rie	a
■ kmsg_printf_20180316155148.txt	21.6 KB	Rie	a
printf.20180316161436.txt	25 KB	Rie	B
81 kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt	2L9KB	Rie	B

New Folder

Import Export

Figure 5-183

5.15 Configuring Account Settings

You can add, modify and delete user accounts, groups, and ONVIF users, and set security questions for admin account.

CD NOTE

The user name supports 31 characters and group name supports 15 characters. The user name can be consisted of letter, number, “_”, “@”, “.”.
You can set maximum 64 users and 20 groups. The group name by “User” and “Admin” cannot be deleted. You can set other groups and define the relevant permissions. However, the admin account cannot be set randomly.
You can manage the account by user and group and the name cannot be repeated. Every user must belong to a group, and one user only belongs to one group.
- 1. Configuring User Account
    1. Adding a User Account

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Account ^ User.

The USER interface is displayed.See Figure 5-184.

Figure 5-184

Step 2 Click Add User.

The Add User interface is displayed. See Figure 5-185.

Figure 5-185

Step 3 Configure the settings for the parameters of adding a user account. See Table 5-64.

Parameter	Description
User Name	Enter a user name and password for the account.
Password	Enter a user name and password for the account.
Confirm Password	Re-enter the password.
Memo	Optional. Enter a description of the account.
User MAC	Enter user MAC address
Group	Select a group for the account. w note The user rights must be within the group permission.
Period	Click Set to display Set interface. Define a period during which the new account can login the device. The new account cannot login the device during the time beyond the set period.
Authority	In the Authority area, select the check boxes in the System tab, Playback tab, and Monitor tab. CQ NOTE To manage the user account easily, when defining the user account authority, it is recommended not to give the authority to the common user account higher that the advanced user account.

Table 5-64

Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.

Setting Permitted Period

Step 1 Next to Period, click Setting.

The Setting interface is displayed. See Figure 5-186.

Figure 5-186

Step 2 Define the permitted period. By default, it is active all the time. • Define the period by drawing.

O Define for a specified day of a week: On the timeline, click the half-hour blocks to select the active period.

O Define for several days of a week: Click H before each day, the icon

switches to Q

. On the timeline of any selected day, click the half-hour blocks

to select the active periods, all the days with Q

will take the same settings.

O Define for all days of a week: Click All, all the switches to . On the

timeline of any day, click the half-hour blocks to select the active periods, all the days will take the same settings.

• Define the period by editing. Take Sunday as an example.

1) Click

The Period interface is displayed. See Figure 5-187.

Figure 5-187

Enter the time frame for the period and select the check box to enable the settings.

O There are six periods for you to set for each day.

O Under Copy, select All to apply the settings to all the days of a week, or select specific day(s) that you want to apply the settings to.

Click OK to save the settings.

Step 3 Click OK.

5.15.1.2 Modify a User Account

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Account ^User.

The USER interface is displayed. See Figure 5-188.

Figure 5-188

Step 2 Click

for the user account that you want to modify.

The Modify User interface is displayed. See Figure 5-189.

Figure 5-189

Step 3 Change the settings for password, user name, user group, user MAC, memo, period, and authority.

Q NOTE

The new password can be set from 8 digits through 32 digits and contains at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , “;”,”:” and “&”).

For the admin account, you can enter or modify email address, enable/disable the unlock pattern, modify the security questions.

• In the Email Address box, enter the email address, and the click Save to save the setting.

• To use the unlock pattern, enable Unlock Pattern, click

, draw a pattern in

the Unlock Pattern interface, and then click Save to save the setting.

• Configuring security questions.

) Click Security Questions.

The Security Questions interface is displayed. See Figure 5-190.

Security Questions

Successfully set. Please delete it first if you want to reset security question ¡again.

Question 1

Delete

Figure 5-190

In the Question list, select questions and enter the answers in the Answer box.
Click Setting to save the settings.

You can use the security questions and answers to reset the password for admin account.

EQ NOTE

To reset the security questions, on the Security Questions, enter the correct answers for each question, and then click Delete.

Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.

5.15.1.3 Deleting a User Account

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Account ^ User.

The USER interface is displayed. See Figure 5-191.

■> USER

GROUP

ONVIFUSER

Step 2 Click

1 Usa Name Group»…. Modify Mat 5«ojs MAC A.. Memo

I admin admin Z t Login Local admin’s account

AiMUfrer

Figure 5-191

for the user account that you want to delete.

A Message is displayed.

Step 3 Click OK to delete a user account.

- 1. Configuring Group Account
    1. Adding a Group

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Account ^ Group.

The GROUP interface is displayed.See Figure 5-192.

Figure 5-192

Step 2 Click Add Group.

The Add Group interface is displayed. See Figure 5-193.

Figure 5-193

Step 3 Configure the settings for the parameters of adding a group. See Table 5-65.

Parameter	Description
Group Name	Enter a name for the group.
Memo	Optional. Enter a description of the account.
Authority	In the Authority area, select the check boxes in the System tab, Playback tab, and Monitor tab.

Table 5-65

Step 4 Click OK to complete the settings.

- - 1. Modifying a Group

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Account ^ Group.

The GROUP interface is displayed.See Figure 5-194.

Figure 5-194

Step 2 Click

for the group account that you want to modify.

Step 3 The Modify Group interface is displayed. See Figure 5-195.

Figure 5-195

Step 4 Change the settings for group name, memo, and authority.

Step 5 Click OK to complete the settings.

- - 1. Deleting a Group

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Account ^ Group.

The GROUP interface is displayed.See Figure 5-196.

USER	2	GlCu® Nd inc	Miriiiy	Ddclc	Memo
□ROUP	1	admin	z	fl	aAnimâraMr ¡¡roup
onvif use n	2	user	/	fl	*user 9aup**

Add Owp

Figure 5-196

Step 2 Click

for the user account that you want to delete.

A Message is displayed.

Step 3 Click OK to delete a group.

- 1. Configuring Onvif Users

The device manufactured by other company can connect to the Device through Onvif protocol by an authorized Onvif account.

NOTE

The admin account is created for Onvif users right after the Device has been initialized

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Account ^ ONVIF USER.

The ONVIF USER interface is displayed. See Figure 5-197.

Figure 5-197

Step 2 Click Add User.

The Add User/Modify interface is displayed. See Figure 5-198.

Figure 5-198

Step 3 Enter user name, password, and select the group that you want this account to belong to.

Step 4 Click OK to save the settings.

Q NOTE

Click □ to modify the account; Click Fl

to delete the account.

5.16 Voice Management

Voice management function manages audio files and configures the playing schedule. When there is an alarm event, the audio file can be activated.

- 1. Configuring Audio Files

You can add audio files, listen to audio files, rename and delete audio files, and configure the audio volume.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ System ^ Voice ^ FILE MANAGER.

The FILE MANAGER interface is displayed.See Figure 5-199.

Figure 5-199

Step 2 Click Add.

The Add interface is displayed. See Figure 5-200.

Browse

Device Name sdcl(USBUSB) 3.71GB/3.73GB(Free/Total)			Refresh	Format

Address /

Name	Size	Type	Delete	Play
■ (fd2b025a-ac98-e383-13ea-lcf86fc539fb)		Folder	a
■ ScreenShot		Folder	B
■ printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk	1.8 KB	File	B
g kmsg_printf_20180317141255.txt.lnk	1.8 KB	File	B
g\| SmartPlayer.exe.Ink	1.7 KB	File	8
a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317134749_…	26 KB	File	□
a Uni+ DVR_chl_main_20180317135000_…	26 KB	File	□
a ty.lnk	L7 KB	File	□
a printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk	1.8 KB	File	a
g kmsg_printf_20180317143922.txt.lnk	1.8 KB	File	B

New Folder			OK	Back

Figure 5-200

Step 3 Select the audio files that you want to import.

Step 4 Click OK to start importing audio files from the USB storage device.

If the importing is successful, the audio files will display in the FILE MANAGER interface. See Figure 5-201.

Figure 5-201

The imported audio files are automatically saved into the HDD, so you do not need to connect to the USB storage device to get the file next time.

•

Click

to play the audio file.

Click

to rename the audio file.

Click to delete the audio file.
To decrease or increase the playing volume, move the slider to the left or to the right.

5.16.2 Configuring Playing Schedule for Audio Files

You can configure the settings to play the audio files during the defined time period.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ System ^ Voice ^ SCHEDULE.

The SCHEDULE interface is displayed.See Figure 5-202.

Figure 5-202

Step 2 Configure the settings for the schedule parameters. See Table 5-66.

Parameter	Description
Period	In the Period box, enter the time. Select the check box to enable the settings. You can configure up to six periods.
File Name	In the File Name list, select the audio file that you want to play for this configured period.
Interval	In the Interval box, enter the time in minutes for how often you want to repeat the playing.
Repeat	Configure how many times you want to repeat the playing in the defined period.
Output	Includes two options: MIC and Audio. It is MIC by default. The MIC function shares the same port with talkback function and the latter has the priority.

Table 5-66

CQ NOTE

• The finish time for audio playing is decided by audio file size and the configured interval.

•

Playing priority: Alarm event > Talkback > Trial listening > Audio file.

5.17 Storage Management

Storage management function manages the stored resources such as recorded video files and storage space. The function aims at providing easier operation and improving the storage efficiency.

- 1. Configuring Basic Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Storage ■+ BASIC.

The BASIC interface is displayed.See Figure 5-203.

Figure 5-203

Step 2 Configure the settings for the basic settings parameters. See Table 5-67.

Parameter	Description
HDD Full	Configure the settings for the situation all the read/write discs are full, and there is no more free disc. Select Stop Record to stop recording Select Overwrite to overwrite the recorded video files always from the earliest time.
Pack Mode	Configure the time length and file length for each recorded video.
Auto-Delete Old Files	Configure whether to delete the old files and if yes, configure the N days.

Table 5-67

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- 1. Configuring the Recording and Snapshot Schedule

The system starts recording and taking snapshot according to the configured schedule. For details, see “5.1.4.9 Configuring Recorded Video Storage Schedule” and “5.1.4.10 Configuring Snapshot Storage ScheduleConfiguring Snapshot Storage Schedule”

- 1. Configuring HDD Manager

You can view the HDD information, format HDD, and configure the HDD type through HDD manager.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Storage ^ HDD MANAGER.

The HDD MANAGER interface is displayed. See Figure 5-204.

In the table, you can view the information of current HDD, such as device name, HDD type, status, total space and free space, and serial number of the HDD port.

Figure 5-204

Step 2 Configuring the settings for the HDD manager.

HDD type setting: In the Type list, select Read/Write, Read-Only or Redundant, and then click Apply to save the settings.
HDD format: Select the HDD that you want to format, click Format, in the pop-up message, click OK to start formatting, and then following the onscreen message to complete formatting.

5.17.4 Configuring HDD Group

You can configure the HDD group to save the specified main stream, sub stream and snapshots

to the designated HDD group.

CAUTION

If “Current HDD Mode is Quota Mode” is shown on the interface, you need to switch to HDD mode.
You can enable either HDD Mode or Quota Mode at one time. The system reboots to activate the settings.

Step 1 Select Main Menu > STORAGE > ADVANCE.

The ADVANCE interface is displayed.See Figure 5-205.

Figure 5-205

Step 2 Select the group for each HDD group, and then click Save to save the settings.

Step 3 After configuring HDD group, under the Main Stream tab, Sub Stream tab and Snapshot tab, configure settings to save the main stream, sub stream and snapshot to different HDD group as selected by you. See Figure 5-206, Figure 5-207, and Figure 5208.

BASIC	HDD	Main Stream	Sub Steam			Snnpshol
SCHEDULE
SCHEDULE	Current HDD Mode is HDD Group.
HDD MANAGER
> ADVANCE	Set AJI Charnel* 1				Adi
> ADVANCE
QUOTA	ÇKırnH	Group Channel	Group	Chitnncl		Group	Channel	Group
	1	1 ’ 2	1 ’	3		1 ’	4	1
HDD DETECT	5	1 – §	1 ’	7		1 ’	8	1 ’
REC ESTIMATE	9	1 * 10	1 W	11		1 ’	12	1 *
FTP	13	1 * 14	1 ’	15		1 •	Ifl	1 •

Apply ^c«ⁿ“ⁱ

Figure 5-206

Figure 5-207

Figure 5-208

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.17.5 Configuring HDD Detecting Settings

CD NOTE

Not all models support this function.

HDD detecting function detects the current status of HDD to let you know the HDD performance and replace the defective HDD.

- - 1. Detecting HDD

You can detect HDD by quick detect and global detect.

Quick detect: Detect the files saved in HDD. The detected bad track can be repaired by formatting. If there are no files in HDD, the system cannot detect the bad track.
Global detect: Detect the whole HDD through Windows, which takes time and might affect the HDD that is recording the video.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■+ Storage ^ HDD DETECT ^ Detect.

The Detect interface is displayed.See Figure 5-209.

Figure 5-209

Step 2 In the Type list, select Quick Detect or Global Detect; and in the HDD list, select the HDD that you want to detect.

Step 3 Click Start Detect.

The system starts detecting the HDD. After detecting is completed, see Figure 5-210.

Q NOTE

During detecting, click Pause to pause detecting, click Continue to restart detecting, and click Stop Detect to stop detecting.

Figure 5-210

- - 1. View Detecting Results

After the detecting is completed, you can view the detecting reports to find out the problem and

replace the defective HDD to avoid data loss.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Storage ^ HDD DETECT ^ Report.

The Report interface is displayed.See Figure 5-211.

Figure 5-211

Step 2 Click

The Details interface is displayed. You can view detecting results and S.M.A.R.T reports. See Figure 5-212 and Figure 5-213.

Figure 5-212

Figure 5-213

- 1. Configuring Quota Settings

You can configure the quote for each channel to be saved into each HDD.

CAUTION

If “Current HDD Mode is HDD Mode” is shown on the interface, you need to switch to Quota mode.
You can enable either HDD Mode or Quota Mode at one time. The system reboots to activate the settings.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ Storage ^ QUOTA.

The QUOTA interface is displayed.See Figure 5-214.

BASIC

Current HEX) Mode is

HOD Group

Change lo Quota Mode

QUOTA

HEX) Que

SATAI

SATA2

REC ESTIMATE

FTP

SATA3

SATAS

SATA7

SATA4

SA TAG

SATAS

Apply

Figure 5-214

Step 2 In the Channel list, select the channel that you want to configure.

Step 3 In the SATA list, select the quota for the selected channel.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

Click Statistics to view the quota of each channel. See Figure 5-215.

Figure 5-215

- 1. Configuring Record Estimate

Record estimate function can calculate how long you can record video according to the HDD capacity, and calculate the required HDD capacity according to the record period.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ STORAGE ^ REC ESTIMATE.

The REC ESTIMATE interface is displayed.See Figure 5-216.

STORAGE Storage / STORAGE / REC ESTIMATE

BASIC	Channel	Edit	Bit Rate(Kb/S)	Record Time	Resolution	Frame Rate	•
	■J 1	X	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
SCHEDULE	■J 2	Z	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
HDD MANAGER	V 3	z	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
HDD MANAGER	V 4	✓”	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
HDD DETECT	•J 5	z	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
HDD DETECT	•J 6	z	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
REC ESTIMATE	V 7		1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25	=
REC ESTIMATE	•J 8	z	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
	■J 9		1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
	V 10	z	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
	V 11	z	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
	V 12	z	1024	24	1280×720(720P)	25
	J 13	z	2048	24	1280*720{720P)	25
	V 14	z	2048	24	1280’720(720P)	25
	15		2048	24	1280*720(720P)	25
	16	z	2048	24	1280*720(720P)	25
	17 / 2048 24 1280*720(720P) Known Space Known Time Capacity 0 TB = 0 GB Select Time 0 Days Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.					25

Figure 5-216

Step 2 Click

The Edit dialog box is displayed. See Figure 5-217.

You can configure the resolution, frame rate, bit rate and record time for the selected channel.

Figure 5-217

Step 3 Click OK to save the settings.

Then the system will calculate the time period that can be used for storage according to the channels settings and HDD capacity.

ED NOTE

Click Copy to copy the settings to other channels.

Calculating Recording Time

Step 1 On the REC ESTIMATE interface, click the Known Space tab.

The Known Space interface is displayed. See Figure 5-218.

Known Space Known Time

Capacity 0 TB= 0 GB Select

Time 0 Days

Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.

Figure 5-218

Step 2 Click Select.

The Select HDD(s) interface is displayed.

Step 3 Select the check box of the HDD that you want to calculate.

In the Known Space tab, in the Time box, the recording time is displayed. See Figure 5-219.

Known Space Known Time

Capacity 2.000 TB= 2000 GB Select

Time 10 Days

Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.

Figure 5-219

Calculating HDD Capacity for Storage

Step 1 On the REC ESTIMATE interface, click the Known Time tab.

The Known Time interface is displayed. See Figure 5-220.

Known Space Known Time

Time 0 Days

Capacity 0 TB = 0 GB

Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record period.

Figure 5-220

Step 2 In the Time box, enter the time period that you want to record.

In the Capacity box, the required HDD capacity is displayed. See Figure 5-221.

Known Space Known Time

Time 2 Days

Capacity 0.376 TB = 376 GB

Note: The record estimation data here is for reference only. Please be cautious when you are calculating record penod

Figure 5-221

- 1. Configuring FTP Storage Settings

You can store and view the recorded videos and snapshots on the FTP server.

Preparation for Configuration

Purchase or download a FTP server and install it on your PC.

CD NOTE

For the created FTP user, you need to set the write permission; otherwise the upload of recorded videos and snapshots will be failed.

Configuration Steps

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Storage •+ FTP.

The FTP interface is displayed.See Figure 5-222.

Figure 5-222

Step 2 Configure the settings for the FTP settings parameters. See Table 5-68.

Parameter	Description
Enable	Enable the FTP upload function.
Host IP	IP address of the PC that is installed with FTP server.
Port	The default is 21.
Anonymity	Enter the user name and password to login the FTP server.
User Name	Enable the anonymity function, and then you can login
Password	anonymously without entering the user name and password.

Parameter	Description
Remote Directory	Create folder on FTP server. If you do not enter the name of remote directory, system automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time. If you enter the name of remote directory, the system creates the folder with the entered name under the FTP root directory first, and then automatically creates the folders according to the IP and time.
File Length(M)	Enter the length of the uploaded recorded video. If the entered length is less than the recorded video length, only a section of the recorded video can be uploaded. If the entered length is more than the recorded video length, the whole recorded video can be uploaded. If the entered length is 0, the whole recorded video will be uploaded.
Image Upload Interval (Sec.)	If this interval is longer than snapshot interval, the system takes the recent snapshot to upload. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 2 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the recent snapshot every 5 seconds. If this interval is shorter than snapshot interval, the system uploads the snapshot per the snapshot interval. For example, the interval is 5 seconds, and snapshot interval is 10 seconds per snapshot, the system uploads the snapshot every 10 seconds. To configure the snapshot interval, select Main Menu ^ Camera ^ Encode ^ Snapshot.
Channel	Select the channel that you want to apply the FTP settings.
Week Day Period 1, Period 2	Select the week day and set the time period that you want to upload the recorded files. You can set two periods for each week day.
Record type	Select the record type (Alarm, Intel, MD, and General) that you want to upload. The selected record type will be uploaded during the configured time period.

Table 5-68

Step 3 Click Test.

The system pops up a message to indicate success or failure. If failed, please check the network connection or configurations.

Step 4 Click Apply to complete the settings.

5.18 Configuring System Settings

- 1. Configuring General System Settings

You can configure the device basic settings, time settings, and holiday settings.

For details about basic and time settings, see “5.1.4.2 Configuring General Settings” and “5.1.4.3 Configuring Date and Time Settings.”

To configure the holiday settings, do the following:

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ System^ GENERAL ^ Holiday.

The Holiday interface is displayed.See Figure 5-223.

Step 2 Click Add a Holiday.

Figure 5-223

The Add a Holiday interface is displayed. See Figure 5-224.

Figure 5-224

Step 3 Configure the holiday name, repeat mode, time range according to your actual situation.

Step 4 Click Add.

The added holiday information is displayed. See Figure 5-225. ED NOTE

Enable the Add More function, so you can continue adding holiday information.

Figure 5-225

- 1. Configuring RS232 Port Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^System ^ RS232.

The RS232 interface is displayed.See Figure 5-226.

Figure 5-226

Step 2 Configure the settings for RS232 port parameters. See Table 5-69.

Parameter	Description
Function	In the Function list, select the protocol for the port. Console: Debug by connecting a mini terminal software. Keyboard: Control the Device by connecting a dedicated keyboard. Adapter: Transit data by connecting to PC. Protocol COM: This function is for card overlay. NetKeyboard: Control the Device by connecting a dedicated keyboard to the LAN port. PTZ Matrix: Connect the video matrix for control. The default setting is Console.
Baudrate	In the Baudrate list, select a value for baudrate length. The default setting is 115200.
Data Bits	In the Data Bits list, select 5, 6, 7, or 8. The default setting is 8.
Stop Bits	In the Stop Bits list, select 1, 1.5, or 2.
Parity	In the Parity list, select None, Odd, Even, Mark, or Null. The default setting is None.

Table 5-69

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- 1. Configuring Security Settings

To ensure the network security and protect data, you can configure the access permission to the Device from host IP (host IP means the PC or server that has an IP).

White list includes the host IP that are permitted to access the Device.
Back list includes the host IP that are not permitted to access the Device.
Updata time white list includes the host IP that are permitted to sync the Device time.
- - 1. Configuring Access Right

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ System ^ Security ^ Access Right.

The Access Right interface is displayed.See Figure 5-227.

Figure 5-227

Step 2 Configure the settings for the security parameters. See Table 5-70.

Parameter	Description
Type	In the Type list, you can select Limits of network-whitelist, Limits of network-blacklist, or Updata time-whitelist.
Enable	Enable the security settings.
Start Address	Enter a single IP address or a start IP address of a network segment.
Add IP Address	Click Add IP Address to add a single IP address.
End Address	Enter the end IP address of a network segment.
Add IP Segment	Click Add IP Segment to add the IP addresses from the start IP through the end IP. CQ NOTE
	The system supports up to 64 IP addresses.

Table 5-70

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- - 1. Enabling Password Reset

Select Main Menu ^ System ^ Security ^ Password Reset, the Password Reset interface

is displayed. The Enable check box is selected by default. See Figure 5-228.

CAUTION

If you clear the Enable check box, you can only use the security questions to reset the password. Make sure you have set the security questions before clearing the check box.

Figure 5-228

- 1. Configuring System Maintenance Settings

When the Device has been running for a long time, you can configure the auto reboot when the Device is not working. You can also configure the case fan mode to reduce noise and extend the service life.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> System ^ System Maintain.

The SYSTEM MAINTAIN interface is displayed. See Figure 5-229.

Figure 5-229

Step 2 Configure the settings for the system maintenance parameters. See Table 5-71.

Parameter	Description
Auto Reboot	In the Auto Reboot list, select the reboot time.
Case Fan Mode	In the Case Fan Mode list, you can select Always run or Auto. If you select Auto, the case fan will stop or start according to the external conditions such as the Device temperature. CQ NOTE
	Not all models support this function, and it is only supported on
	the local configuration interface.

Table 5-71

Step 3 Click Apply to complete the settings.

- 1. Exporting and Importing System Settings

You can export or import the Device system settings if there are several Devices that require the same setup.

NOTE

The IMP/EXP interface cannot be opened if the backup operation is ongoing on the other interfaces.
When you open the IMP/EXP interface, the system refreshes the devices and sets the current directory as the first root directory.
Click Format to format the USB storage device.

Exporting System Settings

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ System ^ IMP/EXP.

The IMP/EXP interface is displayed. See Figure 5-230.

Figure 5-230

Step 2 Insert a USB storage device into one of the USB ports on the Device.

Step 3 Click Refresh to refresh the interface.

The connected USB storage device is displayed. See Figure 5-231.

Ji								S Ô
SYSTEM						System	/ SYSTEM	/ IMP/EXP
GENERAL
	Device Name sdal(USBUSB)	Refresh	Format
SECURITY	Total Space 3.73 GB
	Free Space 3.27 GB
SYSTEM MAINTAIN
	Address /
IMP/EXP
	Name			Size	Typ«		Delete
DEFAULT	■ ScreenShot				Folder		B
	& LANl-20180313213059.pcap			111.7 KB	File		a
UPGRADE	® LAN 1-20180313213722.peap			182.1 KB	File		B
	■ printf_20180314111548.txt			1.2 KB	File		B
	3 kmsg_printf_20180314111548.txt			19.8 KB	File		B
	® printf.txt			1.97 MB	File		B
	iffl kmsg_printf.txt			LI KB	Rie		B
	B\| printf_20180316153903.txt			964 B	File		B
	g) kmsg_printf_20180316153903.txt			2L2KB	file		B
	K printf_20180316154049.txt			1.5 KB	file		B
	@ kmsg_printf_20180316154049.txt			21.7 KB	file		a
	Q printf_20180316155148.txt			2.2 KB	file		B
	■ kmsg_printf_20180316155148.txt			21.6 KB	Fite		B
	® printf_20180316161436.txt			2.5 KB	Fite
	a kmsg_printf_20180316161436.txt			2L9KB	file		B

New Folder

Import Export

Figure 5-231

Step 4 Click Export.

There is a folder under the name style of “Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]”. Doubleclick this folder to view the backup files.

Importing System Settings

Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the exported configuration files from another Device) into one of the USB ports on the Device.

Step 2 Select Main Menu > SYSTEM > IMP/EXP.

The IMP/EXP interface is displayed.

Step 3 Click Refresh to refresh the interface.

The connected USB storage device is displayed.

Step 4 Click on the configuration folder (under the name style of “Config_[YYYYMMDDhhmmss]”) that you want to import.

Step 5 Click Import.

The Device will reboot after the imported is succeeded.

- 1. Restoring Default Settings

Œ NOTE

Only Admin account supports this function.

You can select the settings that you want to restore to the factory default.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ System ^ Default.

The DEFAULT interface is displayed.See Figure 5-232.

Figure 5-232

Step 2 Restore the settings.

Select the settings that you want to restore, and then click Apply. The system starts restoring the selected settings.
Click Factory Default, and then click OK. The system starts restoring the whole settings.

5.18.7 Upgrading the Device

- - 1. Upgrading File

Step 1 Insert a USB storage device containing the upgrade files into the USB port of the Device.

Step 2 Select Main Menu ^ System ^ Upgrade.

The UPGRADE interface is displayed. See Figure 5-233.

Figure 5-233

Step 3 Click System Upgrade.

The System Upgrade interface is displayed. See Figure 5-234.

Figure 5-234

Step 4 Click the file that you want to upgrade.

The selected file is displayed in the Update File box.

Step 5 Click Start.

- - 1. Performing Online Upgrade

When the Device is connected to Internet, you can use online upgrade function to upgrade the system.

Before using this function, you need to check if there is any new version by auto check or manual check.

Auto check: The Device checks if there is any new version available at intervals.
Manual check: Perform real-time check if there is any new version available.

CAUTION

Ensure the correct power supply and network connection during upgrading; otherwise the upgrading might be failed.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ^ System ^ Upgrade.

The UPGRADE interface is displayed.See Figure 5-235.

Figure 5-235

Step 2 Check if there is any new version available.

Auto check: Enable Auto-check for updates.
Manual check: Click Manual Check.

The system starts checking the new versions. After checking is completed, the check result is displayed.

If the “It is the latest version” text is displayed, you do not need to upgrade.
If the text indicating there is a new version, please go the step 3. See Figure 5

236.

Step 3 Click Upgrade now.

5.18.7.3 Uboot Upgrading

CAUTION

Under the root directory in the USB storage device, there must be “u-bootbin.img” file and “update.img” file saved, and the USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.
Make sure the USB storage device is inserted; otherwise the upgrading cannot be performed.

When starting the Device, the system automatically check if there is a USB storage device connected and if there is any upgrade file, and if yes and the check result of the upgrade file is correct, the system will upgrade automatically. The Uboot upgrade can avoid the situation that you have to upgrade through +TFTP when the Device is halted.

5.19 Viewing Information

You can view the information such as log information, HDD information, and version details

- 1. Viewing Version Details

You can view the version details such as device model, system version, and build date.

Select Main Menu ^ Info ^ Version, the VERSION interface is displayed. See Figure 5-237.

Figure 5-237

- 1. Viewing Log Information

You can view and search the log information.

CD NOTE

If there is no HDD installed, the system can save up to 10,000 logs.
If there is HDD installed and has been formatted, the system can save up to 500,000 logs.
If there is HDD installed, the logs about system operations are saved in the memory of the

Device and other types of logs are saved into the HDD. If there is no HDD installed, the other types of logs are also saved in the memory of the Device.

When formatting the HDD, the logs will not be lost. However, if you take out the HDD from the Device, the logs might be lost.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> INFO ^ LOG, the LOG interface is displayed. See Figure 5

238.

Step 2 In the Type list, select the log type that you want to view (System, Config, Storage, Record, Account, Clear, Playback, and Connection) or select All to view all logs.

Step 3 In the Start Time box and End Time box, enter the time period to search, and then click Search.

The search results are displayed. See Figure 5-239.

Figure 5-239

Click Details or double-click the log that you want to view, the Detailed Information interface is displayed. Click Next or Previous to view more log information.
Click Backup to back up the logs into the USB storage device.
Click Clear to remove all logs.
- 1. Viewing Event Information

You can view the event information of the Device and channel.

Select Main Menu ^ Info ^ Event, the EVENT interface is displayed. See Figure 5-240.

Figure 5-240

- 1. Viewing Network Information

You can view the online users, network data transmission details, and test network. For details about testing network, see “5.14.2.1 Testing the Network.”

- - 1. Viewing Online Users

You can view the online user information and block any user for a period of time.

Select Main Menu ^ Info ^ Network ^ Online users, the Online users interface is displayed. See Figure 5-241.

Figure 5-241

To block an online user, click and then enter the time that you want to block this user. The

maximum value you can set is 65535.

The system detects every 5 seconds to check if there is any user added or deleted, and update the user list timely.

- - 1. Viewing the Network Load

Network load means the data flow which measures the transmission capability. You can view the information such as data receiving speed and sending speed.

Step 1 Select Main Menu ■> Info ^ NETWORK ^ Network Load.

The Network Load interface is displayed.See Figure 5-242.

VERSION

LOG

EVENT

ASO

Info / INFO / NETWORK

Online User

Network Load

Network Test

Name MAC Address Status

LANI 20:18:02:09:11:34 Succeed

IP Address Type

172.8.2.51 Ethernet

MTU

1500

Figure 5-242

Step 2 Click the LAN name that you want to view, for example, LAN1.

The system displays the information of data sending speed and receiving speed.

ED NOTE

The default display is LAN1 load.
Only one LAN load can be displayed at one time.
- 1. Viewing HDD Information

You can view the HDD quantity, HDD type, total space, free space, status, and S.M.A.R.T information.

Select Main Menu ^ Info ^ HDD, the HDD interface is displayed. See Figure 5-243.

Figure 5-243

Parameter	Description
SATA	Indicates the quantity of HDD that can be installed. The total quantity is different depending on the model you purchased. o: HDD is in normal working status. -: No HDD is installed.
No.	Indicates the number of the currently connected HDD. * means the current working HDD.
Type	Indicates HDD type.
Total Space	Indicates the total capacity of HDD.
Free Space	Indicates the usable capacity of HDD.
Status	Indicates the status of the HDD to show if it is working normally.
S.M.A.R.T	View the S.M.A.R.T reports from HDD detecting.

Table 5-72

- 1. Viewing Device Status

You can view the information such as CPU temperature and memory usage to know the device status.

Select Main Menu ^ INFO ^ DEVICE STATUS, the DEVICE STATUS interface is displayed.

See Figure 5-244.

Figure 5-244

- 1. Viewing Channel Information

You can view the camera information connected to each channel.

Select Main Menu ^ Info ^ Channel Info, the CHANNEL INFO interface is displayed. See Figure 5-245.

VERSION

NETWORK

HDD

DEVICE STATUS

»■ CHANNEL INFO

Figure 5-245

- 1. Viewing Data Stream Information

You can view the real-time data stream rate and resolution of each channel.

Select Main Menu ^ Info ^ BPS, the BPS interface is displayed. See Figure 5-246.

Figure 5-246

5.20 Logout the Device

On the top right of the Main Menu interface or on any interface after you have entered the Main

Menu, click

Select Logout, you will log out the device.
Select Reboot, the Device will be rebooted.
Select Shutdown, the Device will be turned off.

Web Operations

The interfaces in the Manual are used for introducing the operations and only for reference. The actual interface might be different dependent on the model you purchased. If there is inconsistency between the Manual and the actual product, the actual product shall govern.
The Manual is a general document for introducing the product, so there might be some functions described for the Device in the Manual not apply to the model you purchased.
Besides Web, you can use our Smart PSS to login the device. For detailed information, please refer to Smart PSS user’s manual.
1. Connecting to Network

CD NOTE

The factory default IP of the Device is 192.168.1.108.
The Device supports monitoring on different browsers such as Safari, fire fox, Google on Apple PC to perform the functions such as multi-channel monitoring, PTZ control, and device parameters configurations.

Step 1 Check to make sure the Device has connected to the network.

Step 2 Configure the IP address, subnet mask and gateway for the PC and the Device. For details about network configuration of the Device, see “5.1.4.4 Configuring Network Settings.”

Step 3 On your PC, check the network connection of the Device by using “ping ************” Usually the return value of TTL is 255.

1. Logging in the Web

Step 1 Open the IE browser, enter the IP address of the Device, and then press Enter.

The Login in dialog box is displayed. See Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1

Step 2 Enter the user name and password.

The default administrator account is admin. The password is the one that was configured during initial settings. To security your account, it is recommended to keep the password properly and change it regularly.
Click to display the password.
If you forgot the password, click Forgot Password? to reset the password. For details about resetting the password, see “6.3 Resetting Password.“

Step 3 Click Login.

6.3 Resetting Password

You can reset the password through the reserved email address when you forget the password of admin account.

Step 1 Login the Web of the Device.

TheLogin in dialog box is displayed. See Figure 6-2.

3 RANGÉ’

i psci Natru

Login

Cancel

Figure 6-2

Step 2 Click Forgot Password?

The Reset the password interface is displayed. See Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3

Step 3 Follow the onscreen instructions to scan the QR code and get the security code.

CAUTION

You can get the security code twice by scanning the same QR code. If you need to get the security code once again, please refresh the interface.
Please use the security code received in your email box to reset the password within 24 hours; otherwise the security code becomes invalid.

•

Wrong security code entrance up to five times will cause the security code locked for five minutes. After five minutes, you can continue to use this security code.

Step 4 In the Security code box, enter the security code received in your reserved email box.

Step 5 Click Next.

The new password resetting interface is displayed. See Figure 6-4

Figure 6-4

Step 6 In the Password box, enter the new password and enter it again in the Confirm Password box.

EQ NOTE

The new password can be set from 8 characters through 32 characters and contain at least two types from number, letter and special characters (excluding , , “;”,”:” and

“&”).

Step 7 Click Save. The password resetting is started.

After resetting is completed, a pop-up message is displayed to indicate the result and you will see the login interface is displayed. Then you can use the new password to login the Web.

6.4 Introducing Web Main Menu

After you have logged in the Web, the main menu is displayed. See Figure 6-5.

For detailed operations, you can refer to “5 Local Configurations.”

Figure 6-5

XVR AiD — Thu, 29 Jun 2023 19:45:14 +0000

Hilook DVR User Manual, For the first-time access, you need to activate the video recorder by setting an admin password. No operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the video recorder via web browser, SADP or client software.

Chapter 1 Startup

1. Activate Your Device

For the first-time access, you need to activate the video recorder by setting an admin password. No operation is allowed before activation. You can also activate the video recorder via web browser, SADP or client software.

Before You Start

Power on your device.

Steps

Select a language.
Click Apply.
Input the same password in Password and Confirm Password.

Warning

Strong Password recommended-We highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters.) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly, especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.

Activate network camera(s) connected to the device.

Check Use the Device Password to use the device password to activate the inactive network camera(s).
Enter a password in Camera Activation Password to activate network camera(s). 5. Click Activate.

‘User Name admin

‘Password

‘Confirm Password

‘Camera Activation Password

Pl use the Device P

Figure 1-1 Activation

What to do next

Read Next :

Follow the wizard to set basic parameters.

When you forget your password, there are three methods to reset it, including password resetting email, HiLookVision, and security questions. You have to configure at least one password resetting method. Refer to Set Password Resetting Email and HiLookVision for details.
For unlock pattern. Refer to Set Unlock Pattern for details.
For general system parameters. Refer to General for details.
For general network parameters. Refer to General for details.
For storage device configuration. Refer to Storage Device for details.
For adding network cameras. Refer to Network Camera for details.
For platform configuration. Refer HiLookVision to for details.

1.2 Login

- 1. Set Unlock Pattern

Admin user can use the unlock pattern to login. You can configure the unlock pattern after the device is activated.

Steps

Use the mouse to draw a pattern among the 9 dots on the screen. Release the mouse when the pattern is done.

QU Note

The pattern shall have 4 dots at least.

Each dot can be connected for once only.

Draw the same pattern again to confirm it.

Figure 1-2 Set Unlock Pattern

When the two patterns match, the pattern is configured successfully.

- 1. Log in via Unlock Pattern

Steps

Right click the mouse on live view.

Figure 1-3 Draw the Unlock Pattern

2. Draw the pre-defined pattern to enter the menu operation.

dJNote

If you have forgotten your pattern, you click Forgot My Pattern or Switch User to log in via password.
If you have drawn the wrong pattern for more than 5 times, the system will switch to the normal login mode automatically.

1.2.3 Log in via Password

If your video recorder has logged out, you must login before operating the menu and other functions.

Steps

Select User Name.

Welcome

Figure 1-4 Login Interface

Input password.
Click Login.

C@Note

When you forget the password of the admin, you can click Forgot Password to reset the password.
If you enter the wrong password 7 times, the current user account will be locked for 60 seconds.

Chapter 2 Live View

1. GUI Introduction
Click Target Detection at the upper-left corner, and select a or m to display the specified live target detection results. For result details, click View More.

CU Note

o Target Detection is only available for certain models.

o Target Detection is valid when HDD is installed.

o 0 is valid for motion detection, line crossing detection, intrusion detection, and facial detection.

Click Fl to start/stop auto-switch. The screen will automatically switch to the next one.
Click to enter full screen mode.
Double click a camera to view it in single-screen mode. Double click again to exit single-screen mode.
Change a camera live view screen by dragging it from its screen to the desired screen.
Scroll up/down to turn to previous/next screen.
Position the cursor on a camera to show shortcut menu.

Figure 2-1 Shortcut Menu

Table 2-1 Shortcut Menu Description

Button	Description
	Start playing videos recorded in the latest five minutes.
□	Digital zoom. You can adjust zoom-in times and view the desired area.
^^3	Click it to enter PTZ control mode.
Fl	Turn on/off live view audio.
a	Switch video stream.

• In the live view interface, there are icons at the upper-right corner of the screen for each camera, showing the camera recording and alarm status.

Table 2-2 Live View Icon Description

Icon	Description
	Alarming (normal event and smart event).
	Recording.

• Right click your mouse to display the shortcut menu.

fnJ Menu

Ei Single Screen >

S Window Division >

Previous Screen
Next Screen

O Start Anlc-EMlch

B Camera

® Playback

£ FTZ Control

Figure 2-2 Right Click Shortcut Menu

2.2 PTZ Control

- 1. Configure PTZ Parameter

You shall configure PTZ parameters before controlling a PTZ camera.

Steps

Preview a camera in live view and click 0 on shortcut menu.

PTZ Control Panel Introduction

Table 2-3 PTZ Panel Description

Icon		Description
		Direction buttons, and the auto-cycle button.
	Fast	The speed of the PTZ movement.
CT / Cf		Zoom -/+.
1 / Ö		Focus -/+.
/ ©		Iris -/+.

- 1. Customize Preset

Set a preset location where the PTZ camera would point to when an event occurs.

Steps

Preview a camera in live view and click A on shortcut menu.
Select a desired preset in preset list.
Use direction buttons to wheel the camera to required locations. Adjust zoom and focus as your desire.
Click \* .

What to do next

Double click a preset in the preset list to call it.

- 1. Customize Patrol

Patrol refers to a path consists of a series of presets with designated sequence. It provides dynamic live image for monitoring several presets.

Steps

Preview a camera in live view and click on A shortcut menu.
Click Patrol.
Click 22 of a desired patrol.
Click .
Configure key point parameters, such as the key point No., duration of staying for one key point and speed of patrol. The key point is corresponding to the preset. The preset number determines the order at which the PTZ will follow while cycling through the patrol. Duration refers to the time span to stay at the corresponding key point. Speed defines the speed at which the PTZ will move from one key point to the next.

Figure 2-4 Patrol Settings

Click OK.
Click Save.

What to do next

Select a patrol and click to call it. The PTZ camera will move according the predefined patrol path.

- 1. Customize Pattern

A pattern records the movement path and dwell time in a certain position. When you call a pattern, the PTZ camera will move according to the recorded path.

Steps

Preview a camera in live view and click A on shortcut menu.
Click Pattern.
Select a pattern.
Click O .
Use direction buttons to wheel the camera to required locations. Adjust zoom and focus as your desire.
Click ® . The previous PTZ camera moving path is recorded as a pattern.

What to do next

Select a pattern and click to call it. The PTZ camera will move according the predefined pattern.

Chapter 3 Playback

3.1 GUI Introduction

Go to Playback .

Figure 3-1 Playback

Table 3-1 Playback Interface Description

Button	Operation	Button	Operation
	30 s reverse.	[gj	30 s forward.
ES	Full screen.	□	Start playback.
□	Speed down.	E3	Speed up.
	Speed.

10 1′	r 11 -14 17
	I IZ

Figure 3-2 Timeline

Position the cursor on the timeline, drag the timeline to position to a certain time.
Period marked with blue bar contains video. Red bar indicates the video in the period is event video.
Scroll up/down to zoom out/in timeline.

3.2 Normal Playback

Play back normal videos.

Steps

Go to Playback .
Select a camera from the camera list.
Select a date on the calendar for playback.

Ui Note

The blue triangle at the calendar date corner indicates there are available videos. For example, 22^ means video is available. means no video.

Optional: Position the cursor on playback window to show control bar.

Figure 3-3 Control Bar

Table 3-2 Button Description

Button	Description	Button	Description
□ □ H □ 0	Window division, group the channels and play.	□	Zoom in/out playback image.
□	Turn on/off audio.	□	Add tag.
	Lock/unlock video.	□	Clip video.
□	Show videos that contain human.	□	Show videos that contain vehicle.
Skip Normal Videos	If you have clicked Q / HJ , the device will hide other videos, and only show and play videos that contain human or vehicle during playback.

3.3 Event Playback

When you select the event playback mode, the system will analyze and mark videos that contain the motion detection, line crossing detection, or intrusion detection information, .

Before You Start

Ensure the camera has enabled Dual-VCA. You can enable it via the camera web browser interface in Configuration ^ Video/Audio ^ Display Info. on Stream .
Ensure your video recorder has enabled Save VCA Data. You can enable it in Configuration ^ Record ^ Advanced .

Steps

Go to Playback .
Click Event.
Select a camera.

Figure 3-4 Event Playback

4. Position the cursor on playback window to show control bar.

Table 3-3 Button Description

Button	Description	Button	Description
H	Add tag.	El	Zoom in/out playback image.
□	Clip video.	El	Lock/unlock video.
Fl	Configure detection area.	n	Turn on/off audio.

5. Click ¡3 to set detection areas of line crossing detection, intrusion detection, or motion

detection.

Click g] to search videos. Videos meet the detection rule requirement will be marked in red.
Click E5 to configure the play strategy.

Do not Play Normal Videos

If it is enabled, videos without smart information will not be played.

Normal Video

Set normal video playback speed. The option is only valid when Do not Play Normal Videos is unchecked.

Play Speed of Smart/Custom Video

Set playback speed of videos with smart information. The option is only valid when Do not Play Normal Videos is enabled.

Figure 3-5 Play Strategy

3.4 Back up Clip

You can clip videos during playback. Video clips can be exported to the backup device (USB flash drive, etc.).

Before You Start

Connect a backup device to your video recorder.

Steps

Start playback. Refer to Normal Playback for details.
Click ;: .
Set the start and end time. You can also adjust cursors on the time bar to set the time period.
Click Save.
Select the backup device and folder.
Click Save to export the clip to backup device.
File Search
1. Search File

Steps

Go to Search .

Figure 4-1 Search

2. Select a search type (video, picture, event, etc.).

3. Set search conditions.

4. Click Search.

– Click to play the video.

– Click c? to lock the file. Locked file will not be overwritten.

– Select file(s), and click Export to export file(s) to backup device.

1. Quick Backup

Before You Start

Connect a backup device to your video recorder.

Steps

Go to Search .
Set search conditions.
Click Quick Export.
Select backup device and path.
Click OK to start exporting.
Configuration (Easy Mode)

Easy mode contains basic configurations. Go to Configuration , and click Easy Mode.

1. System Configuration

5.1.1 General

You can configure the output resolution, system time, etc.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ General .

System Date 22-06-2020

System Time 07:50:00

Resolution 1920*1080/60Hz(1080P)(R< ~

Wizard

Lock Screen Password

Figure 5-1 General Settings

Configure the parameters as your desire.

Wizard

The wizard will pop up after the device starts up.

Lock Screen Password

You need to enter your password if the screen is locked.

NTP Time Sync

Network time protocol (NTP) is a networking protocol for time synchronization. The device can connect to NTP (network time protocol) server to sync time.

Interval (min)

Time interval between two time synchronization with NTP server.

NTP Server

IP address of the NTP server.

Click Apply.
1.2 User

Add User

There is a default account: Administrator. The administrator user name is admin. Administrator has the permission to add, delete, and edit user. Guest user only has live view, playback, and log search permission.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ User .
Click Add and confirm your admin password.

Figure 5-2 Add User

Enter user name.
Enter the same password in Password and Confirm.

/K Warning

We highly recommend you create a strong password of your own choosing (Using a minimum of 8 characters, including at least three of the following categories: upper case letters, lower case letters, numbers, and special characters.) in order to increase the security of your product. And we recommend you reset your password regularly, especially in the high security system, resetting the password monthly or weekly can better protect your product.

Click OK.

– Click / ® to edit/delete user.

Set Password Resetting Email

When you forget your login pattern and password, the device will send an email contains verification code to your email for password resetting.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ User .
Click Password Resetting Email.
Enter admin password for authorization.
Enter an email address.
Click OK.

Reset Password

You can reset your password when you forgot your login pattern and password.

Steps

Click Forgot Password at the password login interface.
Click Next if you agree the Privacy Policy, you can scan the QR code to read it.
Follow the wizard to reset password.

5.1.3 Exception

You can receive exception events hint in alarm center, and set exception linkage actions.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ Exception .
Optional: Configure event hint. When the set events occur, you will receive hints in alarm center.
Enable Event Hint.
Click 0 at the upper-right corner of local menu to enter alarm center.
Select an event type.
Click Set to select events to hint.
Set Exception Type
Select Normal Linkage and Trigger Alarm Output type for exception linkage actions.

Figure 5-3 Exceptions

Click Apply.

5.2 Network Configuration

- 1. General

You shall properly configure the network settings before operating the device over network.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General .

Figure 5-4 Network

Set network parameters.

DHCP

If the DHCP server is available, you can enable DHCP to automatically obtain an IP address and other network settings from that server.

Auto Obtain DNS

If DHCP is enabled. You can enable Auto Obtain DNS to automatically obtain Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server.

Click Apply.
2.2 HiLookVision

HiLookVision provides mobile phone application and platform service to access and manage your connected devices, which enables you to get a convenient remote access to the video security system.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ HiLookVision .
Select Access Type as HiLookVision.
Turn on Enable. The service terms will pop up.
Scan the QR code to read the service terms and privacy statement.
Check I have read and agree to Service Terms and Privacy Statement if you agree with the service terms and privacy statement.
Click OK.
Click .£ to set verification code.
Optional: Enable Stream Encryption. It requires to enter verification code in remote access and live view after this function is enabled.
Optional: Edit Server IP.
Bind your device with a HiLookVision account.

) Use a smart phone to scan the QR code, and download HiLookVision app. You can also download it from https://appstore.hikvision.com, or the QR code below. Refer to HiLookVision Mobile Client User Manual for details.

Figure 5-5 Download HiLookVision

2) Use HiLookVision to scan the device QR, and bind the device.

ÜU Note

If the device is already bound with an account, you can click Unbind to unbind with the current account.
You can also use the QR code in gg at the upper-left corner to download HiLookVision and bind your device.

Click Apply.

What to do next

You can access your video recorder via HiLookVision.

5.2.3 Email

Set an email account to receive event notification.

Before You Start

Ensure SMTP service is available for your email.
Configure your network parameters. Refer to General for details.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ Email .

Figure 5-6 Email

Set email parameters

Server Authentication

Check it to enable the server authentication feature.

User Name

The user account of email sender for SMTP server authentication.

Password

The password of email sender for SMTP server authentication.

SSL/TLS

(Optional) Enable SSL/TLS if it is required by the SMTP server.

Attached Picture

(Optional) If events are triggered, it will send images as email attachment.

Sender

The sender name.

Sender’s Address

The sender’s email address.

Select Receiver

Select a receiver. Up to 3 receivers are available.

Receiver

The receiver name.

Receiver’s Address

The receiver’s email address.

OS Note

For network cameras, the event images are directly sent as the email attachment. One network camera only sends one picture.

Optional: Click Test to send a test email.
Click Apply.

5.3 Camera Management

- 1. Configure Signal Input

For certain digital video recorder models, you can configure the analog and IP signal input types.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Analog ^ Analog .
Select signal input type as HD/CVBS or IP for each channel.

HD/CVBS

Four types of analog signal inputs including Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, and CVBS can be connected randomly for the channel.

Network camera can be connected for the channel.

No	I ©HD/CVBS	s OIP
A1		o
A2	®	o
A3	®	o
A4	®	o
A5	®	o
Afi		o

Figure 5-7 Signal Input Type

Click Apply. You can view the maximum network camera accessible number in Max. IP Camera Number.
- 1. Network Camera

Add Network Camera by Device Password

Add network cameras which the password is the same as your video recorder.

Before You Start

Ensure your network camera is on the same network segment with your video recorder.
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct. Refer to General for details.
Ensure the network camera password is the same as your video recorder.

Steps

1. Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ IP Camera . The online cameras on the same network segment with your video recorder are displayed in Online Device List.

I v Online Device List

4- Add | O Refresh

0 I No. i I IP Address i I Status I Protocol I Operation I Device Model I Serial No.

0 1 !■ ts:i A Already connected. »MkBBB ar I

Figure 5-8 IP Camera Management Interface

Select a desired network camera.
Click to add the camera.

C®Note

If the camera is inactive, the device will activate it automatically with the password you have set during device activation.

Add Network Camera Manually

Before You Start

Ensure your network camera is on the same network segment with that of your video recorder.
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.
Ensure the network camera is activated.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ IP Camera .
Click in Added Device List.
Set network camera parameters, including IP address, protocol, management port, etc.
Optional: Enable Use Camera Activation Password to use the device password to add network camera(s).
Optional: Click Add More to add another network camera.
Click Add.

Add IP Camera (Custom) x

O Refresh

No. i I IP Address i I Status I Protocol I Management Port I Device

1 MBMH9 △ (MBMBM MM ■ I C|

IP Camera Address Protocol

Management Port Transfer Protocol User Name Camera Password Use Camera Activation …

G»

Add

Figure 5-9 Add Network Camera

Edit Connected Network Camera

You can edit the IP address, protocol and other parameters of the added network cameras.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ IP Camera .
Click to edit the selected camera.

Channel Port

If the connected device is an encoding device with multiple channels, you can select the channel port No. to choose a connecting channel.

Click OK.
- 1. OSD Settings

Configure OSD (On-Screen Display) settings for the camera, including date format, camera name, etc.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ OSD .
Select a camera.

Figure 5-10 OSD

Set parameters as your desire.
Drag the text frames on the preview window to adjust the OSD position.
Click Apply.
- 1. Motion Detection

Motion detection enables the video recorder to detect the moving objects in the monitored area and trigger alarms.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Motion Detection .
Select a camera.
Check Enable.
Set the motion detection area.

Click Draw Area or Clear to draw or clear areas. The first area is set as full screen by default.
Click Full Screen to set the motion detection area as full screen. You can drag on the preview window to draw motion detection areas.

The operation may differ according to different models.

Adjust Sensitivity. Sensitivity allows you to calibrate how readily movement triggers the alarm. A higher value results in the more readily to triggers motion detection.
Set analysis mode as AI or PIR.

The motion detection event will be analyzed by your device.

PIR

The motion detection event will be analyzed by certain analog PIR cameras.

Optional: Set Target Detection as Human or Vehicle to discard alarms which are not triggered by human or vehicle.

This function is only available for certain models.

Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.
- 1. Configure Arming Schedule

Steps

Select Arming Schedule.
Choose one day of a week and set the time segment. Up to eight time periods can be set within each day.

Note

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Figure 5-11 Set Arming Schedule

Click Apply.
- 1. Configure Alarm Linkage Action

Alarm linkage actions will be activated when an alarm or exception occurs.

Steps

Click Linkage Action.
Set normal linkage actions, alarm output linkage actions, trigger channel, etc.

Alarm Pop-up Window

The local monitor will pop up the alarming channel image when an alarm is triggered. It requires to select the alarming channel(s) in Trigger Channel.

Buzzer Alarm

It will trigger a buzzer beep when an alarm is triggered.

Notify Surveillance Center

The device will send an exception or alarm signal to the remote client software when an alarm is triggered.

Send Email

It will send an email with alarm information when an alarm is triggered.

PTZ Linkage

It will trigger PTZ actions (e.g., call preset/patrol/pattern) when smart events occur.

Audio and Light Alarm Linkage

For certain network cameras, you can set the alarm linkage action as audio alarm or light alarm.

C®Note

Ensure your camera supports audio and light alarm linkage.
Ensure the audio output and volume are properly configured.
If you require to set audio and light parameters, please log into the network camera via web browser to configure them.

Click Apply.

5.4 Recording Management

- 1. Storage Device

Initialize HDD

A newly installed hard disk drive (HDD) must be initialized before it can be used to save videos and information.

Before You Start

Install at least an HDD to your video recorder. For detailed steps, refer to Quick Start Guide.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Storage .
Select an HDD.
Click Init.

Repair Database

Repair an HDD that with error in database. Please operate it with the help of professional technical support.

Secure Erase

Secure erase will delete videos in the selected disk(s).

Add Network Disk

You can add the allocated NAS or IP SAN disk to the video recorder, and use it as a network HDD.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Storage .
Click Add.
Select NetHDD.
Set Type as NAS or IP SAN.
Enter NetHDD IP address.
Click to search the available disks.

Figure 5-12 Add NetHDD

7. Select NAS disk from the list, or manually enter the directory in NetHDD Directory.

8. Click OK. The added NetHDD will be displayed in the storage device list.

5.4.2 Configure Recording Schedule

Video recorder will automatically start/stop recording according to the configured schedule.

Configure Continuous Recording

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Parameter .
Set the continuous main stream/sub-stream recording parameters for the camera. Refer to Configure Recording Parameter for details.
Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Schedule .
Select recording type as Continuous. Refer to Edit Schedule for details.

Configure Event Recording

You can configure the recording triggered by the motion detection, line crossing detection, and intrusion detection.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Smart Event .
Configure the event detection and select the channels to trigger the recording when an event occurs.
Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Parameter .
Set the continuous main stream/sub-stream recording parameters for the camera. Refer to

Configure Recording Parameter for details.

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Schedule .
Select recording type as Event. Refer to Edit Schedule for details.

Edit Schedule

Steps

1. Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Schedule .

Figure 5-13 Recording Schedule

Continuous

Continuous recording.

Event

Recording is triggered by events.

Select a camera in Camera No.
Turn on Enable.
Configure the recording schedule.
Click Edit.

Edit Schedule

Draw

Schedule

5. Click Apply.

Select a day to configure in Weekday.
To set an all-day recording schedule, check All Day and select schedule type.
To set other schedules, uncheck All Day, and set Start/End Time and schedule type.

C@Note

Up to 8 periods can be configured for each day. And the time periods cannot be overlapped with each other.

Click OK to save the settings and go back to upper level menu.
Click to select schedule type as Continuous or Event.
On the table, drag the mouse on the desired period to draw a colored bar.

5.4.3 Configure Recording Parameter

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Parameter .
Configure recording parameters.

Main Stream

Main stream refers to the primary stream that affects data recorded to the hard disk drive and will directly determine your video quality and image size. Comparing with the substream, the main stream provides a higher quality video with higher resolution and frame rate.

Sub-Stream

Sub-stream is a second codec that runs alongside the mainstream. It allows you to reduce the outgoing internet bandwidth without sacrificing your direct recording quality. Sub-stream is often exclusively used by smartphone applications to view live video. Users with limited internet speeds may benefit most from this setting.

Frame Rate

Frame rate refers to how many frames are captured each second. A higher frame rate is advantageous when there is movement in the video stream, as it maintains image quality throughout.

Resolution

Image resolution is a measure of how much detail a digital image can hold: the greater the resolution, the greater the level of detail. Resolution can be specified as the number of pixelcolumns (width) by the number of pixel-rows (height), e.g.,1024×768.

Bitrate

The bit rate (in Kbit/s or Mbit/s) is often referred to as speed, but actually defines the number of bits/time unit and not distance/time unit.

C®Note

Higher resolution, frame rate, and bitrate provide you better video quality, but it also requires more internet bandwidth and uses more storage space on the hard disk drive.

Click Apply.

Chapter 6 Configuration (Expert Mode)

Go to Configuration , and click Expert Mode at the lower-left corner.

1. System Configuration
  1. General

Configure Basic Settings

You can configure the language, system time, output resolution, mouse pointer speed, lock screen password, etc.

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ General ^ Basic Settings , configure the parameters as your desire, and click Apply.

Language

The default language is English.

VGA/HDMI Resolution

Select the output resolution, which must be the same with the resolution of the VGA/HDMI display.

Lock Screen Password

You need to enter password for authentication if the screen is locked.

Mouse Pointer Speed

Set the speed of mouse pointer; 4 levels are configurable.

Wizard

The wizard will pop up after the device starts up.

Figure 6-1 Basic Settings

Configure DST Settings

DST (Daylight Saving Time) refers to the period of the year when clocks are moved one period ahead. In some areas worldwide, this has the effect of creating more sunlit hours in the evening during months when the weather is the warmest.

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ General ^ DST Settings , configure the parameters as your desire, and click Apply.

Configure More Settings

You can configure your device name, lock screen time, output mode, etc.

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ General ^ More Settings , configure the parameters as your desire, and click Apply.

Device Name

Edit the video recorder name.

Device No.

The number is required in the connection with remote control, network keyboard, etc. Edit the serial number of video recorder. The device number ranges from 1 to 255, and the default value is 255.

Lock Screen

Set timeout time for lock screen.

Menu Output Mode

Choose output to display local menu.

CVBS Output Brightness

Adjust the brightness of CVBS output image.

Output Standard

PAL and NTSC are selectable.

Enhanced IP Mode

Enabling enhanced IP mode will allow you to connect to the maximum number of cameras, but disable 2K/4K output resolution, and make perimeter protection, human or vehicle detection of motion detection, facial detection and face picture comparison functions unavailable in analog channel.

- 1. Live View

Configure General Parameters

You can configure the output interface, mute or turning on the audio, event output interface, etc.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ Live View ^ General .

Figure 6-2 Live View-General

Configure the Live View parameters.

Window Division

Select the live view window division.

Auto Switch Interval

The time to dwell in a camera before switching to next camera when auto-switch in live view is enabled.

Alarm Pop-up Output

Select the output to show alarm video.

Alarm Pop-up Delay

Set the time to show alarm event image.

Audio

Turn on/off audio output for the selected video output.

Volume

Adjust the live view, playback, and two-way audio volume for the selected video output interface.

Click Apply.

Configure Live View Layout

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ Live View ^ View .
Set Output Interface.
Select a window, and double click a camera the list you would like to display. + means no camera is displayed on the window.
Optional: Click or (Q to start or stop live view of all cameras.
Click Apply.

Configure Channel-Zero Encoding

Enable the channel-zero encoding when you need to get a remote view of many channels in real time from a web browser or CMS (Client Management System) software, in order to decrease the bandwidth requirement without affecting the image quality.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ Live View ^ General .
Set Video Output Interface as Channel-Zero.
Go to Configuration ^ System ^ Live View ^ Channel-Zero .

Figure 6-3 Channel-Zero

Turn on Enable.
Configure Frame Rate, Max. Bitrate Mode, and Max. Bitrate. The higher frame rate and bitrate require higher bandwidth requirement.
Click Apply.
1.3 User

Refer to User for details.

6.2 Network Configuration

- 1. TCP/IP

TCP/IP must be properly configured before you operate video recorder over network.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ TCP/IP .
Configure network parameters.

Working Mode

Multi-address Mode

The parameters of the two NIC cards can be configured independently. You can select LAN1 or LAN2 in the NIC type field for parameter settings. You can select one NIC card as default route. And then the system is connecting with the extranet and the data will be forwarded through the default route.

Net-fault Tolerance Mode

The two NIC cards use the same IP address, and you can select the Main NIC to LAN1 or LAN2. By this way, in case of one NIC card failure, the video recorder will automatically enable the other standby NIC card so as to ensure the normal running of the whole system.

Load Balance Mode

By using the same IP address and two NIC cards share the load of the total bandwidth, which enables the system to provide two Gigabit network capacity.

C®Note

Working mode is only available for certain models.

NIC Type

Select NIC type as your desire. If your device supports Wi-Fi dongle function, the NIC of Wi-Fi dongle would be selectable after a suitable Wi-Fi dongle is installed.

DHCP

If the DHCP server is available, you can check Enable DHCP to automatically obtain an IP address and other network settings from that server.

MTU

The maximum transmission unit (MTU) is the size of the largest network layer protocol data unit that can be communicated in a single network transaction.

Default Route

Select a route as your desire. If your device supports Wi-Fi dongle function, the route of Wi-Fi dongle would be selectable after a suitable Wi-Fi dongle is installed.

Auto Obtain DNS

If DHCP is checked. You can check Obtain DNS Automatically to obtain Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server.

Click Apply.
- 1. DDNS

Dynamic domain name server (DDNS) maps dynamic user IP addresses to a fixed domain name server.

Before You Start

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ DDNS .

Figure 6-4 DDNS

Turn on Enable.
Select a DDNS type.
Enter parameters including service address, domain name, etc.
Click Apply.

What to do next

You can view DDNS status in Status.

- 1. NAT

Two ways are provided for port mapping to realize the remote access via the cross-segment network, UPnP and manual mapping.

Before You Start

Enable the UPnP function of your router if UPnP is required. When the device network working mode is multi-address, the default device route should be on the same network segment as the LAN IP address of the router.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ NAT .

Enable «d

Mapping Type Manual v

O Refresh
Type	1 Operation	1 External Port	I External IP Address	I Internal Port	I UPnP Status
HTTP Port		80	0.0.0.0	80	Inactive
RTSP Port		554	0.0.0.0	554	Inactive
Server Port	£.	8000	0.0.0.0	8000	Inactive
HTTPS Port	£	443	0.0.0.0	443	Inactive
HIK Cloud P2P Comman..	£.	9010	0.0.0.0	9010	Inactive
Cloud P2P Data Port		9020	0.0.0.0	9020	Inactive

Apply

Figure 6-5 NAT

Turn on Enable.
Select Mapping Type as Manual or Auto

Auto The port mapping items are read-only, and the external ports are set by the router automatically. You can click Refresh to get the latest status of the port mapping.

Manual Select an external port type. Click to edit External Port. You can use the default external port No., or change it according to actual requirements. External Port indicates the port No. for port mapping in the router.

The value of the RTSP port No. should be 554 or between 1024 and 65535, while the value of the other ports should be between 1 and 65535 and the value must be different from each other. If multiple devices are configured for the UPnP settings under the same router, the value of the port No. for each device should be unique.

Set the virtual server of your router, including internal source port, external source port, etc. The virtual server parameters shall be corresponding with your device port.
- 1. Wi-Fi

For certain models, after installing a Wi-Fi dongle to your device, the device would be able to connect to a wireless network, and the channels in your device can be viewed thorough Wi-Fi. For example, if your device is connected with several network cameras or analog cameras (Wi-Fi network cameras currently cannot be connected), after the device is connected to a wireless network, you would be able to access your device and view the connected channels through Wi-Fi.

Before You Start

Prepare a suitable Wi-Fi dongle, and insert it in to the USB interface at the rear panel.
Ensure your device support this function.

Steps

1. Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ Wi-Fi .

LJilNote

The Wi-Fi setting interface will automatically pop up when you insert the Wi-Fi dongle for the first time.

2. Connect to a wireless network.

Connect to an Automatically Searched Wireless Network	Double click the wireless network from the list as you desired. Set wireless network parameters. Click OK.
Connect to a Customized Wireless Network	Click Custom Adding. Set wireless network parameters. Click OK.
Connect to a Wireless Network with WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)	Click WPS Settings. Check Enable WPS. Set wireless network parameters. Click Apply.

Mil Note

If you requires to edit or forget the network, double click the connected network, and edit it as your desire.

After connecting to an available wireless network, you can view the connection result in Connection Status.

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ TCP/IP .
Set Select NIC and Default Route as WLAN0.
Check Enable Wi-Fi.
Set other network parameters.
Click Apply.

6.2.5 Log Server Settings

Upload Logs to the Server

You can upload system logs to the server for backup.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ Log Server Settings .

Enable

Upload Time Interval (h)

Server IP Address

Port

Apply

Figure 6-6 Log Server Settings

Turn on Enable
Set Upload Time Interval, Server IP Address, and Port.
Optional: Click Test to test if parameters are valid.
Click Apply.

One-Way Authentication

You can install a CA certificate (from the server) to your device to authorize the server via web browser. It would improve the log communication security.

Before You Start

Download the CA certificate from the server.
Ensure log server parameters are valid.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ Advanced Settings ^ Log Server Configuration .

Figure 6-7 One-Way Authentication

Install the CA certificate in CA Certificate.
Optional: Click Test to test if the connection is valid.
Click Save.

Two-Way Authentication

You can install a CA certificate (from the server) to your device to authorize the server, and create a certificate (from your device) to authorize your device by the server. This would improve the log communication security. Two-way authentication can be configured via web browser.

Before You Start

Download the CA certificate from the server.
Ensure log server parameters are valid.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ Advanced Settings ^ Log Server Configuration .

Figure 6-8 Two-Way Authentication

Install the CA certificate in CA Certificate.
Click Create in Client Certificate, and follow the pop-up to create the certificate.
Click Download to download the certificate file to a desired location.
Upload the downloaded certificate file to the server, and the server will return the certificate key.
Open the certificate as a text file, and modify it by the certificate key as the server returned.
Install the modified certificate in Client Certificate.
Optional: Click Test to test if the connection is valid.
Click Save.
.6 NTP

Your device can connect to a network time protocol (NTP) server to ensure that the system time is accurate.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ NTP .
Turn on Enable.
Enter the parameters.

Interval

Time interval between two time synchronization with NTP server.

NTP Server

IP address of the NTP server.

Click Apply.
- 1. Ports (More Settings)

Set different port types to enable relevant functions as your desire.

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ More Settings .

Alarm Host IP/Port

The device will send the alarm event or exception message to the alarm host when an alarm is triggered. The remote alarm host must have the client management system (CMS) software installed.

Alarm Host IP refers to the IP address of the remote PC on which the CMS software (e.g., iVMS-4200) is installed, and the Alarm Host Port (7200 by default) must be the same as the alarm monitoring port configured in the software.

Server Port

For remote client software access. Ranges from 2000 to 65535. The default value is 8000.

HTTP Port

For remote web browser access. The default value is 80.

Multicast IP

Multicast can be configured to enable live view for cameras that exceed the maximum number allowed through network. A multicast IP address covers Class-D IP ranging from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 and it is recommended to use the IP address ranging from 239.252.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

When adding a device to the CMS software, the multicast address must be the same as that of the device.

RTSP Port

RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) is a network control protocol designed for use in entertainment and communications systems to control streaming media servers. The port is 554 by default.

Output Bandwidth Limit

You can check the checkbox to enable output bandwidth limit.

Output Bandwidth

After enable the output bandwidth limit, input the output bandwidth.

C®Note

The output bandwidth limit is used for the remote live view and playback.
The default output bandwidth is the maximum limit.

Figure 6-9 Port Settings

- 1. HiLookVision

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ Platform Access . Refer to HiLookVision for details.

- 1. Email

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ Email . Refer to Email for details.

6.3 Camera Management

- 1. Configure Signal Input

For certain digital video recorder models, you can configure the analog and IP signal input types.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Analog ^ Analog , or click Edit at the upper-right corner in Configuration ^ Camera ^ Camera .
Select signal input type as HD/CVBS or IP.

HD/CVBS

Four types of analog signal inputs including Turbo HD, AHD, HDCVI, and CVBS can be connected randomly for the channel.

Network camera can be connected for the channel.

Figure 6-10 Signal Input Type

3. Click Apply. You can view the maximum network camera accessible number in Max. IP Camera Number.

- 1. Network Camera

Add Automatically Searched Online Network Camera

Add the network cameras to your video recorder.

Before You Start

Ensure your network camera is on the same network segment with your video recorder.
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.
Ensure the network camera password is the same as your video recorder.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Camera .
Click Online Device List. The online cameras on the same network segment will be displayed in the list.

Figure 6-11 Online Device

3. Optional: Click Edit IP to edit camera IP addresses in batch. The system will allocate IP addresses to the selected cameras in order.

0X1 Note

Ensure the selected cameras are activated.

Select a network camera, and click Add to add it.

Add Network Camera Manually

Add the network cameras to your video recorder.

Before You Start

Ensure your network camera is on the same network segment with that of your video recorder.
Ensure the network connection is valid and correct.
Ensure the network camera is activated.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Camera .
Click .

Add IP Camera (Custom) x

O Refresh

No. î I IP Address i I Status I Protocol I Management Port I Device

1 v m △ mb mm ■ ci

IP Camera Address Protocol

Management Port Transfer Protocol User Name Camera Password Use Camera Activation …

Cancel

Add

Figure 6-12 Add IP Camera

Enter network camera parameters.

Use Camera Activation Password

If it is enabled, the video recorder will add the camera by the set channel default password.

Click Add.

Edit Connected Network Camera

You can edit the IP address, protocol and other parameters of the added network cameras.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Camera ^ IP Channel .
Click of an added network camera.

Channel Port

If the connected device is an encoding device with multiple channels, you can choose the channel to connect by selecting the channel port No. in the drop-down list.

Click OK.

Import/Export IP Camera Configuration File

The information of added network camera can be generated into an excel file and exported to the local device for backup, including the IP address, port, password of admin, etc. And the exported file can be edited on your computer, like adding or deleting the content, and copy the setting to other devices by importing the excel file to it.

Before You Start

Connect a backup device, such as a USB flash drive, to your video recorder.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Camera .
Click More.
Click Export/Import to export/import configuration files to the connected backup device.
Set the storage device and folder path.
Click Export/Import.

What to do next

After the importing process is completed, you must restart the video recorder.

Advanced Settings

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Camera .
Click More.
Configure the parameters as your desire.

H.265 Auto Switch Configuration

If you enable the option, the device will automatically switch to H.265 stream for the network camera (which supports H.265 video format) for the initial access.

Upgrade

Upgrade the added network cameras.

Export/Import

The information of added network camera can be generated into an excel file and exported to the local device for backup, including the IP address, port, password of admin, etc. And the exported file can be edited on your computer, like adding or deleting the content, and copying the settings to other devices by importing the excel file to it.

Protocol

To connect the network cameras which are not configured with the standard protocols, you can configure the customized protocols for them. The system provides 16 customized protocols.

Camera Activation Password Settings

Change the default password for activating and adding network cameras. For network cameras that are already connected, you can choose to change their passwords to this one in the following pup-up window.

Batch Configuration

The device can automatically synchronize time of the selected network cameras.

- 1. Display Settings

Configure the OSD (On-Screen Display), image settings, exposure settings, day/night switch settings, etc.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Display .
Set Camera.
Configure parameters as your desire.

OSD Settings

Configure the OSD (On-screen Display) settings for the camera, including date/time, camera name, etc.

Image Settings

Customize the image parameters including the brightness, contrast, and saturation for the live view and recording effect.

Exposure

Set the camera exposure time (1/10000 to 1 sec). A larger exposure value results in a brighter image.

Day/Night Switch

The camera can be set to day, night, or auto switch mode according to the surrounding illumination conditions.

Backlight

Set the camera’s wide dynamic range (0 to 100). When the surrounding illumination and the object have large differences in brightness, you should set the WDR value.

Image Enhancement

For optimized image contrast enhancement.

Figure 6-13 OSD

4. Drag the text frames on the preview window to adjust the OSD position.

5. Click Apply.

- 1. Privacy Mask

You are allowed to configure the privacy mask areas that cannot be viewed or recorded.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Privacy Mask .
Select Camera.
Turn on Enable.

Figure 6-14 Privacy Mask

4. Drag to draw an area on the window. The frames of the areas will be marked with different colors.

Note

Up to 4 privacy mask areas can be configured. The size of each area can be adjusted.

5. Click Apply.

6.4 Event Configuration

- 1. Normal Event

Motion Detection

Motion detection enables the video recorder to detect the moving objects in the monitored area and trigger alarms.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Camera ^ Motion Detection .
Select a camera.
Check Enable.
Set the motion detection area.

Click Draw Area or Clear to draw or clear areas. The first area is set as full screen by default.
Click Full Screen to set the motion detection area as full screen. You can drag on the preview window to draw motion detection areas.

Adjust Sensitivity. Sensitivity allows you to calibrate how readily movement triggers the alarm. A higher value results in the more readily to triggers motion detection.
Set analysis mode as AI or PIR.

The motion detection event will be analyzed by your device.

PIR

The motion detection event will be analyzed by certain analog PIR cameras.

Optional: Set Target Detection as Human or Vehicle to discard alarms which are not triggered by human or vehicle.
Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.

Video Tampering

Trigger alarm when the lens is covered and take alarm response actions.

Steps

1. Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Normal Event ^ Video Tampering .

Figure 6-15 Video Tampering

Set Camera.
Turn on Enable.
Adjust Sensitivity as your desire. The higher the value is, the more easily the video tampering can be triggered.
Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.

Video Loss

Detect video loss of a camera and take alarm response actions.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Normal Event ^ Video Loss .
Set Camera.
Turn on Enable.
Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.

Alarm Input

Set linkage actions for an external sensor alarm.

Steps

1. Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Normal Event ^ Alarm Input .

Figure 6-16 Alarm Input

Local alarm input: Local alarm input is triggered by the external device that connected to the video recorder’s terminal block.

Click of a desired alarm input.

Figure 6-17 Edit Alarm Input

Customize Alarm Name.
Set alarm type as N.O (normally open) or N.C (normally closed).
Set Settings as Input to enable the function.

C®Note

If you set Settings as Nonuse, the alarm input will be disabled. If you set Settings as One-Key Disarming, the selected linkage method(s) of the alarm input will be disabled.

Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.

Alarm Output

Trigger an alarm output when an alarm is triggered.

Steps

1. Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Normal Event ^ Alarm Output .

Figure 6-18 Alarm Output

Click of a desired alarm output.
Customize Alarm Name.
Select Dwell Time.

Edit

Alarm Output No.

Dwell Time | 5s

Alarm Status Close

Alarm Name

Arming Schedule

■ Continuous <> Clear Edit ® Clear All

| Copy to Trigger

Figure 6-19 Edit Alarm Output

Apply

Set Settings as Input to enable the function.
Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Click Apply.

Exception

Exception events can be configured to take the event hint in the live view window and trigger alarm outputs and linkage actions.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Normal Event ^ Exception .
Configure event hint. When the set events occur, you will receive hints in alarm center.
Enable Event Hint.
Select events to hint. Choose from:

Click of Event Hint Configuration to select events.
Click gj in the upper-right corner of local menu to enter alarm center to select events.

Select Exception Type to set its linkage actions.

Event Hint «3

Set Event Hint ®

Exception Type HDD Full v

□ Normal Linkage □ Trigger Alarm Output

□ Buzzer Alarm □ 10.6.113.250:8000->1

□ 10.6.113.250:8000->2

□ Notify Surveillance Center

□ Send Email

Apply

Figure 6-20 Exceptions

Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Click Apply.

6.4.2 Perimeter Protection

Perimeter protection includes line crossing detection, intrusion detection, region entrance detection, and region exiting detection.

C®Note

Perimeter protection is only available for certain device models or camera models.

Line Crossing Detection

Line crossing detection detects people, vehicles, and objects crossing a set virtual line. The detection direction can be set as bidirectional, from left to right or from right to left.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Perimeter Protection ^ Line Crossing .
Set Camera.
Turn on Enable.
Set the detection rules and detection areas.
Set Arming Area.
Set Direction as A<->B, A->B, or A<-B.

A<->B

Only the arrow on the B side shows. An object crossing a configured line in both directions can be detected and trigger alarms.

A->B

Only an object crossing the configured line from the A side to the B side can be detected.

B->A

Only an object crossing the configured line from the B side to the A side can be detected.

Click Draw Area and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region.
Adjust Sensitivity. Sensitivity allows you to calibrate how readily movement triggers the alarm. A higher value results in the more readily to triggers motion detection.
Optional: Set Target Detection as Human or Vehicle to discard alarms which are not triggered by human or vehicle.

C®Note

This function is only available for certain models.

Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.

Intrusion Detection

Intrusion detection function detects people, vehicles, or objects that enter and loiter in a predefined virtual region.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Perimeter Protection ^ Intrusion .
Select Camera to configure.
Turn on Enable.
Set the detection rules and detection areas.
Select Arming Area.
Adjust Time Threshold and Sensitivity.

Sensitivity

The size of the object that can trigger the alarm. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm will be triggered. Its range is [1-100].

Time Threshold

Range [1s-10s], the threshold for the time of the object loitering in the region. When the duration of the object in the defined detection area is longer than the set time, the alarm will be triggered.

Optional: Set Target Detection as Human or Vehicle to discard alarms which are not triggered by human body or vehicle.

US Note

This function is only available for certain models.

Click Draw Area and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region.
Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.

Region Entrance Detection

For certain network cameras, region entrance detection function detects people, vehicles or other objects which enter a pre-defined virtual region from the outside place, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Smart Event ^ Region Entrance .
Set Camera.
Turn on Enable.
Optional: Check Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detection.
Set the detection rules and detection areas.
Set Arming Area. Up to 4 arming areas are selectable.
Adjust Sensitivity. Sensitivity: Range [0-100]. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.
Optional: Set Target Detection as Human or Vehicle to discard alarms which are not triggered by human body or vehicle.

C0 Note

This function is only available for certain models.

Click Draw Area and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region.
Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.

Region Exiting Detection

For certain network cameras, region exiting detection function detects people, vehicles or other objects which exit from a pre-defined virtual region, and some certain actions can be taken when the alarm is triggered.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Smart Event ^ Region Exiting .
Set Camera.
Turn on Enable.
Optional: Check Save VCA Picture to save the captured pictures of VCA detection.
Set the detection rules and detection areas.
Set Arming Area. Up to 4 arming areas are selectable.
Adjust Sensitivity. Sensitivity: Range [0-100]. The higher the value is, the more easily the detection alarm can be triggered.
Optional: Set Target Detection as Human or Vehicle to discard alarms which are not triggered by human body or vehicle.

OS Note

This function is only available for certain models.

Click Draw Area and draw a quadrilateral in the preview window by specifying four vertexes of the detection region.
Set the arming schedule. Refer to Configure Arming Schedule for details.
Set the linkage actions. Refer to Configure Alarm Linkage Action for details.
Click Apply.
- 1. Configure Arming Schedule

Steps

Click Arming Schedule.
Choose one day of a week and set the time segment. Up to eight time periods can be set within each day.

C® Note

Time periods shall not be repeated or overlapped.

Figure 6-21 Set Arming Schedule

Click Apply.
- 1. Configure Alarm Linkage Action

Configure Alarm Pop-up Window

When an alarm is triggered, the local monitor displays in full screen the video image from the alarming channel configured for full screen monitoring. And when the alarm is triggered simultaneously in several channels, you must configure the auto-switch dwell time.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ Live View ^ General .
Set the event output and dwell time.

Alarm Pop-up Output

Select the output to show event video.

Alarm Pop-up Delay

Set the time in seconds to show alarm event image. If alarms are triggered simultaneously in several channels, their full-screen images will be switched at an interval of 10 seconds (default dwell time).

Click Linkage Action of the alarm detection.
Select Alarm Pop-up Window alarm linkage action.
Select the channel(s) in Trigger Channel settings you want to make full screen monitoring.

C@Note

Auto-switch will terminate once the alarm stops and back to the live view interface.

Configure Buzzer Alarm

The audio warning enables the video recorder to trigger an audible beep when an alarm is detected.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ System ^ Live View ^ General .
Turn on Audio, and set Volume.
Go to Linkage Action interface of the alarm detection.
Select Buzzer Alarm linkage action.

Notify Surveillance Center

The video recorder can send an exception or alarm signal to the remote alarm host when an event occurs. The alarm host refers to the computer installed with client software (e.g., iVMS-4200, iVMS-5200).

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ General ^ More Settings .
Set Alarm Host IP and Alarm Host Port.
Go to Linkage Action interface of the alarm detection.
Select Notify Surveillance Center.

Configure Email Linkage

The video recorder can send an email with alarm information to a user or users when an alarm is detected.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Network ^ Email .
Configure the settings.
Go to Linkage Action interface of the alarm detection.
Select Send Email as alarm linkage action.

Trigger Alarm Output

The alarm output can be triggered by the normal and smart events.

Steps

Go to Linkage Action interface of the alarm input or event detection.
Click Trigger Alarm Output.
Select the alarm outputs to trigger.
Go to Configuration ^ Event ^ Normal Event ^ Alarm Output .
Select an alarm output item from the list. Refer to Alarm Output for details.

Configure PTZ Linkage

Video recorder can trigger the PTZ actions (e.g., call preset/patrol/pattern) when the alarm event, or VCA detection events occur.

Steps

Go to Linkage Action interface of the alarm input or VCA detection.
Select PTZ Linkage.
Select the camera to perform the PTZ actions.
Select the preset/patrol/pattern No. to call when the alarm events occur.

Figure 6-22 PTZ Linkage

E@Note

You can set one PTZ type only for the linkage action each time.

6.5 Recording Management

- 1. Configure Recording Schedule

Video recorder will automatically start/stop recording according to the configured schedule.

Configure Continuous Recording

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Parameter .
Set the continuous main stream/sub-stream recording parameters for the camera.
Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Schedule .
Select recording type as Continuous.

Configure Event Recording

You can configure the recording triggered by the normal event or smart event.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Event .
Configure the event detection and select the cameras to trigger the recording when event occurs.
Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Parameter .
Set the continuous main stream/sub-stream recording parameters for the camera.
Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Schedule .
Select recording type as Event.

Edit Schedule

Steps

1. Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Schedule .

Figure 6-23 Recording Schedule

Continuous

Continuous recording.

Event

Recording triggered by all event triggered alarms.

Select a camera in Camera No.
Turn on Enable.
Configure the recording schedule.
Click Edit.
Select a day to configure in Weekday.
To set an all-day recording schedule, check All Day and select schedule Type.
To set other schedules, uncheck All Day and set Start/End time and schedule Type.

LttiLNote

Up to 8 periods can be configured for each day. And the time periods cannot be overlapped with each other.

Click OK to save the settings and go back to upper level menu.
¡Note

You can also select schedule type as Continuous or Event, and drag the cursor on the desired period to draw a colored bar.

Click Advanced to set advanced parameters.

Record Audio

Audio will be record to the video file.

Pre-Record

The time you set to record before the scheduled time or event. For example, when an alarm triggers the recording at 10:00, and if you set the pre-record time as 5 seconds, the camera records at 9:59:55.

Post-Record

The time you set to record after the event or the scheduled time. For example, when an alarm triggered recording ends at 11:00, and if you set the post-record time as 5 seconds, it records till 11:00:05.

Stream Type

Main stream and sub-stream are selectable for recording. When you select sub-stream, you can record for a longer time with the same storage space.

Video/Picture Expired Time

The expired time is period for a recorded file to be kept in the HDD. When the deadline is reached, the file will be deleted. If you set the expired time to 0, the file will not be deleted. The actual keeping time for the file should be determined by the capacity of the HDD.

Figure 6-24 Advanced Parameters

Click OK to save the advanced settings.
Click Apply.
- 1. Configure Recording Parameter

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Parameter to configure camera main stream and sub-stream parameters.
Configure recording parameters.

Main Stream

Sub-Stream

Frame Rate

Frame rate refers to how many frames are captured each second. A higher frame rate is advantageous when there is movement in the video stream, as it maintains image quality throughout.

Resolution

Bitrate

The bit rate (in Kbit/s or Mbit/s) is often referred to as speed, but actually defines the number of bits/time unit and not distance/time unit.

Enable H.264+/Enable H.265+

The H.264+/H.265+ mode helps to ensure the high video quality with a lowered bitrate. It can effectively reduce the need of bandwidth and HDD storage space.

Click Apply.
- 1. View Estimated Recording Period

After recording schedule and parameters are configured, the device will calculate an estimated recording period for reference.

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Recording Period to view the estimated recording period. You can click Configure to edit recording parameters.

- 1. Storage Device

Initialize HDD

If it is the first time you use your HDD, please initialize it after it is installed.

Before You Start

Install at least an HDD to your video recorder.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Storage .
Select an HDD.
Click Init.

Repair Database

Repair an HDD that with error in database. Please operate it with the help of professional technical support.

Secure Erase

Secure erase will delete videos in the selected disk(s).

Add Network Disk

You can add the allocated NAS or IP SAN disk to the video recorder, and use it as a network HDD.

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Storage .
Click Add.
Set NetHDD.
Set Type as NAS or IPSAN.
Enter NetHDD IP address.
Click to search the available disks.

Figure 6-25 Add NetHDD

7. Select NAS disk from the list, or manually enter the directory in NetHDD Directory.

8. Click OK.

Note

Up to 8 TB storage capacity is allowed for each network disk.

Result

The added network disks will be displayed in the storage device list.

6.5.5 Configure Storage Mode

Configure HDD Groups

Multiple HDDs can be managed in groups. Video from specified channels can be recorded onto a particular HDD group through HDD settings.

Steps

C@Note

This function is only available for certain models.

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Storage Mode .
Select Mode as Group.
Select a group number.
Select IP cameras to record on the HDD group.

Figure 6-26 Group

Click Apply.
Restart the video recorder to activate the new storage mode settings.
After restart, go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Storage .
Click of desired HDD to set the group.
Select a group number for the current HDD.
Click OK.

L-LilNote

Regroup the cameras for HDD if the HDD group number is changed.

Configure HDD Quota

Each camera can be configured with an allocated quota for storing videos.

Steps

C@Note

This function is only available for certain models.

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Storage Mode .
Set Mode as Quota.
Select a camera to set quota in Camera.
Enter the storage capacity in Record Capacity.

Figure 6-27 Quota

‘Note

When the quota capacity is set to 0, all cameras will use the total capacity of HDD for videos and pictures.

Click Apply.
Restart the video recorder to activate the new settings.

6.5.6 Advanced Settings

Steps

Go to Configuration ^ Record ^ Advanced .
Configure the parameters as your desire.

Overwrite

Disable: When the HDD is full, video recorder will stop writing.
Enable: When hard drive is full, video record will continue to write new files by deleting the oldest files.

Enable HDD Sleeping

HDDs which are free of working for a long time will turn into sleep status.

Save Camera VCA Data

Camera VCA data will be saved so that you can search it.

Alarm Storage

When the HDD free space is not enough, you can disable it to save space, but your device will stop storing alarm information.

Picture Storage

When the HDD free space is not enough, you can disable it to save space, but your device will stop storing pictures.

H.264+/265+ for All the Analog Cameras

Enable H.264+/265+ for all the analog cameras.

6.6 RS-232 Settings

Steps

C0 Note

This function is only available for certain models.

Go to Configuration ^ RS-232 .
Configure RS-232 parameters, including baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity, flow control and usage.

Console

Connect a computer to the video recorder through the computer serial port. Video recorder parameters can be configured by using software such as HyperTerminal. The serial port parameters must be the same as those of video recorder when connecting with the computer serial port.

Transparent Channel

Connect a serial device directly to the video recorder. The serial device will be controlled remotely by the computer through the network and the protocol of the serial device.

Click Apply.
Maintenance
1. Restore Default

Steps

Click 0 at the upper-right corner.
Select the restoring type.

Simple Restore

Restore all parameters, except the network (including IP address, subnet mask, gateway, MTU, NIC working mode, default route, server port, etc.) and user account parameters, to the factory default settings.

Factory Defaults

Restore all parameters to the factory default settings.

Restore to Inactive

Restore the device to the inactive status, and leave all settings unchanged except restoring user accounts.

Click Yes. The device will reboot automatically.
1. Search Log

The operation, alarm, exception and information of video recorder can be stored in logs, which can be viewed and exported at any time.

Steps

Click ® at the upper-right corner.
Click More.
Click Log Information.
Set the search conditions.
Click Search.
1. System Service

Steps

Click ® at the upper-right corner.
Click More.
Click System Service.
Configure the parameters as your desire.

RTSP

You can specifically secure the stream data of live view by setting the RTSP authentication.

RTSP Authentication

Two authentication types are selectable, if you select digest, only the request with digest authentication can access the video stream by the RTSP protocol via the IP address. For security reasons, it is recommended to select digest as the authentication type.

ISAPI

ISAPI (Internet Server Application Programming Interface) is an open protocol based on HTTP, which can realize the communication between the system devices (e.g., network camera, NVR, etc.). The video recorder is used as a server, the system can find and connect the video recorder.

HTTP

The admin user account can disable the HTTP service from the GUI or the web browser. After the HTTP is disabled, all the related services, including ISAPI and ONVIF, will terminate as well.

HTTP Authentication

If you need to enable the HTTP service, you can set the HTTP authentication to enhance the access security. Two authentication types are selectable. For security reasons, it is recommended to select digest as the authentication type.

Camera Added Detection

The function detects the network camera status. If the network camera has been added by another video recorder, the network camera status will show as □ in Online Device list.

Click Apply.
1. Upgrade

Warning

Do not shutdown or turn off the power during upgrade.

- 1. Local Upgrade

Before You Start

Store the upgrade firmware to a backup device, and connect it to your device.

Steps

Click El at the upper-right corner.
Click O .
Click Local Upgrade.
Select a backup device in Device Name.
Select the upgrade firmware.
Click Upgrade. Your device will reboot automatically.
- 1. Online Upgrade

Upgrade the device with the latest online firmware.

Before You Start

Ensure HiLookVision is enabled and properly configured. Refer to HiLookVision for details.

Steps

Click 0 at the upper-right corner.
Click O .
Click Online Upgrade.
Download the latest firmware.

Auto Download The will automatically check and download the latest firmware.

Test Upgrade Click Test Upgrade to manually check and download the latest firmware.

Upgrade your device if a new firmware version is available. The device will reboot automatically.
Alarm

When events occur, you can view their details in alarm center.

1. Set Event Hint

Select the events to hint in alarm center.

Steps

Click H at the upper-right corner.
Set Exception, Basic Event, or Smart Event as your desire.

Figure 8-1 Alarm Center

Click ® and select events to hint.
Click OK.

When the selected events occur, the alarm information will be displayed in H (locating at the upper-right corner of local menu).

1. View Alarm in Alarm Center

Steps

Click at the upper-right corner of local menu.
Click Exception, Basic Event, or Smart Event to view as your desire.
Web Operation
1. Introduction

You can get access to the video recorder via web browser.

You may use one of the following listed web browsers: Internet Explorer 11.0, Apple Safari, Mozilla Firefox, and Google Chrome. The supported resolutions include 1024×768 and above.

For certain models, you will have to download a web component plug-in, and install it. Otherwise, a few functions would be unavailable. The download address is http://

hikdownload.ys7.com/web/webplugin/windows/WebComponents/standard/ WebComponents.exe .

1. Login

You shall acknowledge that the use of the product with Internet access might be under network security risks. For avoidance of any network attacks and information leakage, please strengthen your own protection. If the product does not work properly, please contact with your dealer or the nearest service center.

Steps

Open web browser, input the IP address of the video recorder and then press Enter.

C@Note

If you have changed HTTP port, enter http://IP address:HTTP port in address bar. E.g., http: 192.168.1.64:81.

Enter user name and password in the login interface.
Click Login.

Figure 9-1 Login

4. Follow the installation prompts to install the plug-in.

El® Note

You may have to close the web browser to finish the installation of the plug-in.

1. Live View

After login, live view interface shows.

Figure 9-2 Live View

1. Playback

Click Playback to enter playback interface.

Figure 9-3 Playback

1. Configuration

Click Configuration to enter configuration interface.

Figure 9-4 Configuration

1. Log

Steps

Go to Maintenance ^ System ^ Maintenance ^ Log .
Set the search conditions.
Click Search.

Figure 9-5 Log

Chapter 10 Appendix

10.1 Glossary

Dual-Stream

Dual-stream is a technology used to record high resolution video locally while transmitting a lower resolution stream over the network. The two streams are generated by the DVR, with the main stream having a maximum resolution of 1080P and the sub-stream having a maximum resolution of CIF.

DVR

Acronym for Digital Video Recorder. A DVR is device that is able to accept video signals from analog cameras, compress the signal and store it on its hard drives.

HDD

Acronym for Hard Disk Drive. A storage medium which stores digitally encoded data on platters with magnetic surfaces.

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a network application protocol used by devices (DHCP clients) to obtain configuration information for operation in an Internet Protocol network.

HTTP

Acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. A protocol to transfer hypertext request and information between servers and browsers over a network.

PPPoE

PPPoE, Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating Point-to- Point Protocol (PPP) frames inside Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with ADSL services where individual users connect to the ADSL transceiver (modem) over Ethernet and in plain Metro Ethernet networks.

DDNS

Dynamic DNS is a method, protocol, or network service that provides the capability for a networked device, such as a router or computer system using the Internet Protocol Suite, to notify a domain name server to change, in real time (ad-hoc) the active DNS configuration of its configured hostnames, addresses or other information stored in DNS.

Hybrid DVR

A hybrid DVR is a combination of a DVR and NVR.

NTP

Acronym for Network Time Protocol. A protocol designed to synchronize the clocks of computers over a network.

NTSC

Acronym for National Television System Committee. NTSC is an analog television standard used in such countries as the United States and Japan. Each frame of an NTSC signal contains 525 scan lines at 60Hz.

NVR

Acronym for Network Video Recorder. An NVR can be a PC-based or embedded system used for centralized management and storage for IP cameras, IP Domes and other DVRs.

PAL

Acronym for Phase Alternating Line. PAL is also another video standard used in broadcast televisions systems in large parts of the world. PAL signal contains 625 scan lines at 50Hz.

PTZ

Acronym for Pan, Tilt, Zoom. PTZ cameras are motor driven systems that allow the camera to pan left and right, tilt up and down and zoom in and out.

USB

Acronym for Universal Serial Bus. USB is a plug-and-play serial bus standard to interface devices to a host computer.

XVR AiD — Thu, 01 Dec 2022 19:13:34 +0000

This guide will walk you through the process of setting up your new Hikvision DVR system from taking it out of the box to getting all of your cameras up and running.

Find yourself somewhere in your house with enough space to set up your entire system and ensure it works before mounting the cameras in position.
Ensure that you have enough power sockets available. You will need one for the DVR and one for each of your cameras.

There are two different software versions that are used on Hikvision recorders. Please follow the section below that is relevant to the version that you have on your DVR.

Load More :

How to set up a Hikvision Wi-Fi Kit

Hikvision Hilook Firmware 2022

SADP tool Hikvision password reset

The first step is the same for both software versions. The first thing to do is plug everything in. The DVR should be connected to the power, a suitable monitor and to your router if you wish to have the system connected to the internet, with the mouse from the box connected in to one of the USB ports on the DVR. Each camera should be powered using one of the included power supplies and to one of the inputs on the back of the DVR.

Passwords

The first thing you will be prompted to do is set a password. You need to create a password, confirm it in the second box and enter the same password in the IP Camera Activation box. We recommend leaving the Security Question box ticked as this will allow you to create answers to three security questions which will enable you to reset your password if you forget it in the future.

After creating your password you will be prompted to Export a GUID file.

This step is optional but as with the security questions will make resetting your password much easier if you forget it in future. To do this you will need to plug a USB Memory Stick in to one of the USB ports on the DVR and then click Yes on the prompt.

On the next screen make sure that USB Flash Disk is selected and press Export followed by Back. This will save the GUID file to your USB Memory Stick so please keep it in a safe place.

Finally you will be asked to set an Unlock Pattern, once set this can be used as an alternative to the password. Click and drag a line across at least 4 dots before repeating the same pattern to confirm.

Setup Wizard

After creating your unlock pattern the setup wizard will start. This is the easiest way to set up the basic functions of the DVR so we will follow the setup wizard through from here.

1) The first page shows you some basic system information about how many IP cameras can be added to your DVR. Most DVRs can accept at least 2 IP cameras however for the purpose of this guide we are going to treat this purely as an analogue system. Click Apply.

2) Next choose your desired language and press Apply.

3) If you wish to see the wizard each time then leave the Start Wizard When Device Starts box ticked, if you do not wish to see the wizard again then untick the box and then press Apply.

4) If the time displayed is not correct it can be updated here. Click on the box for the relevant piece of information and it will allow you to input a new date & time or change time zone or date format.

5) The next screen is for your network settings. The simplest option here is to tick the Enable DHCP box which will instruct your DVR to automatically assign itself the correct settings for your network. If you are more confident with networking you are able to manually assign network settings however for most users Enable DHCP is sufficient.

6) Next is the Remote Viewing setup. This is for if you would like to be able to view your cameras on either a phone or tablet. If that is something you would like to do then tick the Enable box and follow this guide otherwise you can leave the box empty and press Next.

7) The next page will show you more network settings, for most users this can all be ignored so simply click Next.

8) If you do not have a Hard Drive installed in your DVR the next page can be skipped. If you have got a Hard Drive installed you will need to select your Hard Drive by ticking the box to the left of the device and then click Init. You will see the Status change to Initialising, wait until the status shows Normal and then press Next.

9) Most users can skip the next page, it is only relevant if you are planning to add any IP cameras to your DVR so for the purposes of this guide we will simply press Next again.

10) The final step on the wizard allows you to set some basic recording settings. If you would like your cameras to be recording all the time click the cog icon next to Continuous, if you would like them to only record when something moves in front of them you can press the cog icon next to Motion Detection.

Press Finish and you will be returned to the home page of the DVR and will see the live feed from your cameras.

Additional Steps

You may find that your NVR is making an audible beep at regular intervals after completing the setup. These can indicate a range of things such as there being no hard drive present in the system to it not being connected to the internet. These can be useful to indicate if there is a fault but they can be unnecessary, for example if you are choosing not to connect your DVR to the internet then the system warning you that the system isn’t connected to the internet isn’t very useful. As a result what we can do is switch off the audible beeps.

1) While watching the live view for your cameras, right click and select Menu.

2) Enter your password or unlock pattern and then navigate to Configuration > Exceptions

3) Change the Exception Type to All, make sure that the Audible Warning box is blank and press Apply.

How to Set up a Hikvision DVR System

Language

The first thing that needs setting is the language for the system. If you wish to leave the system in English simply press Exit, otherwise select your desired language from the drop down menu and press Apply followed by Exit.

After selecting your language you may see a message like the following image:

If you see this message it simply means that the system can output in a different resolution that matches your chosen monitor better. Press Yes to continue.

Passwords

The next step is the creation of your password and making sure that you are able to reset it if the password is forgotten in future.

Enter your desired password in the Create and Confirm boxes. We would also recommend using the same password in the Channel Default box. The three options you see in the middle of the screen, Reserved E-mail Settings, Export GUID and Security Question Configuration all relate to various methods for resetting your password if you forget it in future. We very strongly recommend that you leave all three options enabled in case the password is ever forgotten. Finally press OK.

The next page will prompt you to enter an email address.

After that will be the GUID Export page. At this point you need to plug a USB memory stick in to one of the USB ports. Select the device from the Device Name menu and press Export. Once you see confirmation that the file has been exported press Back.

Next are the security questions. Select 3 questions from the available options and enter your chosen answer for each question before clicking OK.

The final step is creating an unlock pattern. Draw a line that connects at least 4 dots before repeating it to confirm the pattern.

Setup Wizard

After creating your unlock pattern the setup wizard will start. This is the easiest way to set up the basic functions of the DVR so we will follow the setup wizard through from here.

1) First we set the date & time on the system. Select your time zone and check that the date & time are accurate. If they need changing you can click in the box for each section which will pop up the option to make the change.

2) The next screen is for your network settings. The simplest option here is to tick the Enable DHCP box which will instruct your DVR to automatically assign itself the correct settings for your network. If you are more confident with networking you are able to manually assign network settings however for most users Enable DHCP is sufficient.

3) If you do not have a Hard Drive installed in your DVR the next page can be skipped. If you have got a Hard Drive installed you will need to select your Hard Drive by ticking the box to the left of the device and then click Init. You will see the Status change to Initialising, wait until the status shows Normal and then press Next.

4) Most users can skip the next page, it is only relevant if you are planning to add any IP cameras to your DVR so for the purposes of this guide we will treat this as a purely analogue system and simply press Next again.

5) Next is the Remote Viewing setup. This is for if you would like to be able to view your cameras on either a phone or tablet. If that is something you would like to do then tick the Enable box and follow this guide otherwise you can leave the box empty and press Next.

6) The final page gives you the option to change your password. If you wish to change your password you can tick the box next to New Admin Password however if you are happy with the password you have already set simply click Finish.

Additional Steps

1) Right click to show the row of menu icons at the top of the screen. Open the settings menu by clicking the cog icon.

2) Navigate to Event > Normal Event > Exception.

3) Change the Exception Type to All, make sure that the Audible Warning box is blank and press Apply.

XVR AiD — Sat, 04 Jun 2022 20:31:56 +0000

Hikvision Hilook Firmware regularly updates the firmware in our products to resolve potential issues and keep your system running smoothly. Below, you can find guidance on how to update your system accordingly.Updating Hikvision IP Camera Firmware

To upgrade the firmware of a Hikvision IP camera, please follow the steps below:

Locate the appropriate firmware by clicking this link
Click on the firmware, then click download.
Agree to the license terms and conditions when prompted.
Locate the downloaded firmware file (this typically will be in the default download folder, unless prompted for a download location, then choose Desktop) and extract it by right-clicking on the file and selecting extract all or unzip. When prompted for an extract location, choose Desktop to extract the final file to. A file labeled DIGICAP will appear on the desktop.
After the file is extracted, log into the camera using Internet Explorer or Firefox web browsers. If prompted to install the plugin (or to allow the plugin to run), follow the prompt to proceed with the upgrade procedure.
Log into the camera using the administrator username and password, then go to the Configuration tab. In this tab, go to Basic Configuration then System, and then click on the Maintenance tab.
On the bottom of the page under Remote Upgrade, press the Browse button to locate and choose the firmware file, which was previously saved on the Desktop. After selecting the file, click Open, then click Upgrade.
The camera will display a prompt that a reboot is necessary to complete the upgrade. Click OK. The camera will reboot when the firmware is successfully upgraded.

Click here to see a video tutorial of the above steps.

Upgrading Hikvision DVR/NVR Firmware

To upgrade the firmware of a Hikvision DVR or NVR, please follow the steps below:

Insert a USB flash drive into the computer’s USB port (Please note that the USB flash drive does not need to be empty; it may contain other files and documents).
Locate the appropriate firmware by clicking this link
Click on the firmware, then click download.
Agree to the license terms and conditions when prompted.
Locate the downloaded firmware file (this typically will be in the default download folder, unless prompted for a download location, then choose Desktop) and extract it by right-clicking on the file and selecting extract all or unzip. When prompted for an extract location, choose the USB flash drive (typically labeled by letters E, F and so on) to extract the final file to. A file labeled DIGICAP will appear in the USB flash drive.
After the firmware has been extracted (unzipped), remove the USB flash drive from the computer and insert it into one of the available USB ports on the DVR/NVR unit.
On the DVR/NVR, go to the Main Menu, and then go to Maintenance.
From the sub-menus on the left click Upgrade. This will display the content of the USB flash drive.
Choose the DIGICAP file and press Upgrade.
An information window will pop up prompting that the unit will reboot after the upgrade is complete. Click YES.
To verify that the firmware has been upgraded, after the DVR/NVR is rebooted, go to the Main Menu, and then go to System Information. The current firmware version will be displayed.

Click here to see a video tutorial of the above steps.

By downloading the firmware from this web page you are agreeing to Hikvision’s Software User License Agreement. Please be aware that Hikvision products are region-specific and regionally supported. If you have purchased your Hikvision products from an online source or unauthorized distributor, they may not be compatible with the North American region’s firmware and are considered to be “gray market” product. If your camera has “CH” in the serial number, you are most likely using a “gray market” product. Updating the firmware from this site can lead to several complications in those cameras, up to and including camera failure. Restoring a “gray market” product to its original condition is a factory process and will result in a Chinese interface. As Hikvision warranty is void in this case, you must rely on the dealer for any service, support, and warranty of the “gray market” product. If you have any questions or concerns about the official status of your Hikvision distributor, please contact Hikvision USA Customer Service at cust.usa@hikvision.com.

[mks_button size=”large” title=”All Firmware Files” style=”squared” url=”https://us.hikvision.com/en/support-resources/firmware” target=”_blank” bg_color=”#ff3a3a” txt_color=”#FFFFFF” icon=”fa-download” icon_type=”fa” nofollow=”1″]

Warning: Firmware upgrades must be done in ascending order and cannot skip versions.

DS-2CD6425G1-10

iDS-2CD7A46G0-IZHSY 2.8-12mm

Blazer Pro

DS-2CD2012WD-I

DS-2CD2022WD-I

DS-2CD2023G0-I

DS-2CD2023G2-I(U)

DS-2CD2025FHWD-I

DS-2CD2025FWD-I

DS-2CD2032-I

DS-2CD2035FWD-I

DS-2CD2042WD-I

DS-2CD2043G0-I

DS-2CD2043G0-IB

DS-2CD2043G2-I(U)

DS-2CD2045FWD-I

DS-2CD2047G1-L

DS-2CD2047G2-LU

DS-2CD2055FWD-I

DS-2CD2063G0-I

DS-2CD2065G1-I

DS-2CD2083G0-I

DS-2CD2083G2-I(U)

DS-2CD2085FWD-I

DS-2CD2085G1-I

DS-2CD2087G2-L

DS-2CD2112F-I

DS-2CD2112F-IWS

DS-2CD2122FWD-I*

DS-2CD2122FWD-IS*

DS-2CD2122FWD-ISB

DS-2CD2123G0-I

DS-2CD2123G2-IU

DS-2CD2125FHWD-I

DS-2CD2125FHWD-IS

DS-2CD2125FWD-I

DS-2CD2125G0-IMS

DS-2CD2132F-I

DS-2CD2132F-IWS

DS-2CD2135FWD-I

DS-2CD2142FWD-IS(B)

DS-2CD2143G0-I

DS-2CD2143G0-IB

DS-2CD2143G2-IU

DS-2CD2145FWD-I

DS-2CD2145FWD-IS

DS-2CD2146G1-IS

DS-2CD2147G2-L(SU)

DS-2CD2147G2-SU

DS-2CD2152F-IS

DS-2CD2155FWD-I

DS-2CD2163G0-I

DS-2CD2165G0-I

DS-2CD2165G0-IS

DS-2CD2183G0-I

DS-2CD2183G0-IB

DS-2CD2183G2-IU

DS-2CD2185FWD-I

DS-2CD2185FWD-IB

DS-2CD2185FWD-IS

DS-2CD2185G0-IMS

DS-2CD2212-I5

DS-2CD2232-I5

DS-2CD2312WD-I

DS-2CD2322WD-I

DS-2CD2323G0-I

DS-2CD2323G2-I(U)

DS-2CD2325FHWD-I

DS-2CD2325FWD-I

DS-2CD2327G1-L

DS-2CD2327G1-LU

DS-2CD2332-I

DS-2CD2335FWD-I

DS-2CD2342WD-I

DS-2CD2343G0-I

DS-2CD2343G0-IB

DS-2CD2343G2-I(U)

DS-2CD2345FWD-I

DS-2CD2346G1-I

DS-2CD2346G1-I/SL

DS-2CD2347G1-L

DS-2CD2347G1-LU

DS-2CD2347G2-LSU/SL

DS-2CD2347G2-LU

DS-2CD2352-I

DS-2CD2355FWD-I

DS-2CD2363G0-I

DS-2CD2365G1-I

DS-2CD2383G0-I

DS-2CD2383G0-IB

DS-2CD2383G2-I(U)

DS-2CD2385FWD-I

DS-2CD2385G1-I

DS-2CD2385G1-IB

DS-2CD2387G2-LSU/SL

DS-2CD2387G2-LU

DS-2CD2412F-IW

DS-2CD2422FWD-IW

DS-2CD2432F-IW

DS-2CD2455FWD-IW

DS-2CD2512F-I

DS-2CD2522FWD-IS(B)

DS-2CD2522FWD-IS*

DS-2CD2522FWD-IWS

DS-2CD2523G0-IS

DS-2CD2523G0-IWS

DS-2CD2523G2-I(S)

DS-2CD2525FWD-IS

DS-2CD2532F-IS

DS-2CD2542FWD-IWS

DS-2CD2543G0-IS

DS-2CD2543G0-ISB

DS-2CD2543G0-IWS

DS-2CD2543G2-I(WS)

DS-2CD2543G2-IS

DS-2CD2545FWD-I

DS-2CD2545FWD-IS

DS-2CD2547G2-LS

DS-2CD2552F-IS

DS-2CD2555FWD-IS

DS-2CD2563G0-IS

DS-2CD2583G2-I(S)

DS-2CD2622FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2623G1-IZS

DS-2CD2623G2-IZS

DS-2CD2625FHWD-IZS

DS-2CD2625FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2642FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2643G1-IZS

DS-2CD2643G2-IZS

DS-2CD2645FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2645G1-IZ(S)

DS-2CD2646G1-IZS

DS-2CD2647G2-LZS

DS-2CD2665G0-IZS

DS-2CD2683G1-IZS

DS-2CD2683G2-IZS

DS-2CD2685G0-IZS

DS-2CD2685G1-IZ(S)

DS-2CD2712FWD-I

DS-2CD2722FWD-IZS(B)

DS-2CD2722FWD-IZS*

DS-2CD2723G1-IZS

DS-2CD2723G2-IZS

DS-2CD2725FHWD-IZS

DS-2CD2725FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2742FWD-IZS(B)

DS-2CD2743G1-IZS

DS-2CD2743G1-IZSB

DS-2CD2743G2-IZS

DS-2CD2745FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2746G1-IZS

DS-2CD2747G2-LZS (C)

DS-2CD2755FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2765G0-IZS

DS-2CD2783G1-IZS

DS-2CD2783G1-IZSB

DS-2CD2783G2-IZS

DS-2CD2785G0-IZS

DS-2CD2935FWD-IS

DS-2CD2955FWD-IS

DS-2CD2D14WD

DS-2CD2D14WD/M

DS-2CD2D21G0-D/NF

DS-2CD2D21G0/M-D/NF

DS-2CD2E10F

DS-2CD2E20F

DS-2CD2E43G2-U

DS-2CD2H25FHWD-IZS

DS-2CD2H25FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2H35FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2H43G2-IZS

DS-2CD2H45FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2H55FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2H83G2-IZS

DS-2CD2H85FWD-IZS

DS-2CD2T12-I5

DS-2CD2T22WD-I5

DS-2CD2T25FHWD-I5

DS-2CD2T25FWD-I5

DS-2CD2T27G1-L

DS-2CD2T32-I5

DS-2CD2T35FWD-I5

DS-2CD2T42WD-I5

DS-2CD2T45FWD-I5

DS-2CD2T46G1-4I

DS-2CD2T46G1-4I/SL

DS-2CD2T47G1-L

DS-2CD2T47G2-LSU/SL

DS-2CD2T52-I5

DS-2CD2T55FWD-I5

DS-2CD2T65G1-I5

DS-2CD2T85FWD-I5

DS-2CD2T85G1-I5

DS-2CD2T87G2-LSU/SL

DS-2CD4A24FWD-IZH

DS-2CD4A26FWD-IZHS/P

DS-2CD4A26FWD-IZHS8/P

DS-2CD5046G0-AP

DS-2CD5065G0-AP

DS-2CD5085G0-AP

DS-2CD50C5G0-AP

DS-2CD5126G0-IZS

DS-2CD5146G0-IZS

DS-2CD5185G0-IZS

DS-2CD51C5G0-IZS

DS-2CD5526G0-IZHS

DS-2CD5526G0-IZHS8

DS-2CD5546G0-IZHS

DS-2CD5546G0-IZHS8

DS-2CD5565G0-IZHS

DS-2CD5585G0-IZHS

DS-2CD5585G0-IZHS8

DS-2CD55C5G0-IZHS

DS-2CD5A26G0-IZHS

DS-2CD5A26G0-IZHS8

DS-2CD5A46G0-IZ/UH

DS-2CD5A46G0-IZHS

DS-2CD5A46G0-IZHS8

DS-2CD5A85G0-IZHS

DS-2CD5A85G0-IZHS8

DS-2CD5AC5G0-IZHS

DS-2CD6026FHWD-A11

DS-2CD6026FHWD-A3

DS-2CD6365G0E-IS

DS-2CD6365G0E-IVS

DS-2CD6365G0E-S/RC

DS-2CD63C5G0-IS

DS-2CD63C5G0-IVS

DS-2CD63C5G0E-IS

DS-2CD63C5G0E-IVS

DS-2CD63C5G0E-S/RC

DS-2CD6425G1-20

DS-2CD6425G1-30

DS-2CD6626DS-IZHS

DS-2CD6825G0/C-IS

DS-2CD6825G0/C-IVS

DS-2CD6924G0-IHS

DS-2CD6984G0-IHS

DS-2CD6D24FWD-IZHS

DS-2CD6D52G0-IHS

DS-2CD6D54FWD-IZHS

DS-2CD6D54G1-IZS

DS-2CD6D54G1-ZS/RC

DS-2CD6D82G0-IHS

DS-2CD6W45G0-IVS

DS-2CD7046G0-AP

DS-2CD7126G0/L-IZS

DS-2CD7146G0-IZS

DS-2CD7146G0-IZS8

DS-2CD7185G0-IZS

DS-2CD7526G0-IZHS

DS-2CD7526G0-IZHS8

DS-2CD7585G0-IZHS

DS-2CD7585G0-IZHS8

DS-2CD7A26G0/P-IZHS

DS-2CD7A46G0-IZHS

DS-2DE2204IW-DE3

DS-2DE2A404IW-DE3

DS-2DE3304W-DE

DS-2DE3404W-DE

DS-2DE3A400BW-DE(F1)(S5)

DS-2DE4225W-DE

DS-2DE4225W-DE3

DS-2DE4425IW-DE(S6)

DS-2DE4A225IW-DE

DS-2DE4A425IW-DE

DS-2DE5225IW-AE

DS-2DE5232W-AE

DS-2DE7232IW-AE

DS-2DE7430IW-AE

DS-2DE7530IW-AE

DS-2DE7A425IW-AEB(T5)

DS-2DE7A432IW-AEB

DS-2DE7A825IW-AEB(T5)

DS-2DF5232X-AE3

DS-2DF5232X-AEL

DS-2DF6A436X-AEL

DS-2DF6A832X-DE3(T5)

DS-2DF6A836X-AEL(T5)

DS-2DF8242IX-AELW(T3)

DS-2DF8442IXS-AELW(T2)

DS-2DF8442IXS-AELW(T5)

DS-2DF8C435MHS-DELW

DS-2DF8C842IXS-AELW(T2)

DS-2DF9C245IHS-DLW(T2)

DS-2DP3236ZIXS-D/440/T2

DS-2DY3220IW-DE

DS-2DY3220IW-DE4

DS-2DY5225IX-AE(T5)

DS-2PT3326IZ-DE3

DS-2PT5326IZ-DE

DS-2SE7C432MW-AEB(14F1)(P3)

DS-2SF8C442MXS-DLW(14F1)(P3)

DS-2TD1217-2/3/6/PA

DS-2TD1217-2/3/6/V1

DS-2TD1217-x/V1(A)

DS-2TD1217B-3/PA

DS-2TD1217T-2/PA

DS-2TD1228-2/3/QA

DS-2TD1228T-2/3/QA

DS-2TD2117-3/6/V1

DS-2TD2136-7/10/15/25/35

DS-2TD2136-7/10/15/25/35/V1

DS-2TD2136T-10/15/25

DS-2TD2166-7/15/25/35

DS-2TD2166-7/15/25/35/V1

DS-2TD2166T-15/25

DS-2TD2235D-25/50

DS-2TD2336-50/75/100

DS-2TD2366-50/75/100

DS-2TD2367-50/75/P

DS-2TD2466-25Y/50Y

DS-2TD2615-7/10

DS-2TD2617-3/6/10/PA

DS-2TD2617-3/6/V1

DS-2TD2617B-6/PA

DS-2TD2628-3/7/10/QA

DS-2TD2628T-3/7/QA

DS-2TD2636-10/15

DS-2TD2636B-13/P

DS-2TD2637-10/15/25/35/P

DS-2TD2637T-15/P

DS-2TD2667-15/35/P

DS-2TD2836-25/50

DS-2TD2836-25/50/V1

DS-2TD2866-25/50

DS-2TD2866-25/50/V1

DS-2TD4136-25/50

DS-2TD4136-25/50/V2

DS-2TD4137-25/W

DS-2TD4137T-9/W

DS-2TD4166-25/50

DS-2TD4166-25/50/V2

DS-2TD4167-50/W

DS-2TD4228T-10/W

DS-2TD6236-50H2L/75C2L

DS-2TD6236-50H2L/75H2L/V2

DS-2TD6266-50H2L/75C2L/100C2L

DS-2TD6266-50H2L/75C2L/100C2L/V2

DS-2TD6267-100C4L/W

DS-2TD6267-75C4L/W

DS-2TD8166-150ZE2F/180ZE2F/V2

DS-2TD8167-190ZE2F/W

DS-2TE127-G4A

DS-2TP21B-6AVF/W

DS-2TP31B-3AUF

DS-2TX3742-35A/P

DS-2XC6122FWD-IS

DS-2XC6142FWD-IS

DS-2XE6825G0-IZHS

DS-2XE6885G0-IZHS

DS-2XS2T47G0-LDH/4G/C18S40

DS-2XS6A87G1-L/C32S80

DS-3E1318P-EI

DS-3E1326P-EI

DS-6408HDI-T

DS-6701HWI

DS-6704HWI

DS-6708HQHI-SATA

DS-6708HWI

DS-6716HQHI-SATA

DS-6716HWI

DS-6901UDI(B)

DS-6908UDI(B)

DS-6916UDI(B)

DS-7204HGHI-SH

DS-7204HQHI-K1

DS-7204HQI-K1/P

DS-7204HTI-K1

DS-7204HUHI-F1/N

DS-7204HUHI-K1

DS-7204HUI-K1

DS-7204HUI-K1/P

DS-7208HGHI-SH

DS-7208HQHI-K2

DS-7208HQI-K2/P

DS-7208HTI-K2

DS-7208HUHI-F2/N

DS-7208HUHI-K2

DS-7208HUI-K2

DS-7208HUI-K2/P

DS-7216HGHI-SH

DS-7216HQHI-K2

DS-7216HQI-K2/P

DS-7216HUHI-F2/N

DS-7216HUHI-K2

DS-7216HUI-K2

DS-7216HUI-K2/P

DS-7308HQHI-SH

DS-7308HQI-K4

DS-7308HUI-K4

DS-7316HQHI-SH

DS-7316HQI-K4

DS-7316HTI-K4

DS-7316HUHI-F4/N

DS-7316HUI-K4

DS-7332HGHI-SH

DS-7332HQI-K4

DS-7332HUI-K4

DS-7604NI-E1/4P

DS-7604NI-Q1/4P

DS-7608NI-E2/8P

DS-7608NI-I2/8P

DS-7608NI-Q2/8P

DS-7608NXI-I2/8P/4S

DS-7608NXI-I2/8P/S

DS-7616NI-E2/16P

DS-7616NI-I2/16P

DS-7616NI-Q2/16P

DS-7616NXI-I2/16P/4S

DS-7616NXI-I2/16P/S

DS-7716NI-I4/16P

DS-7716NI-SP/16

DS-7716NXI-I4/16P/4S

DS-7716NXI-I4/16P/S

DS-7732NI-I4

DS-7732NI-I4/16P

DS-7732NI-I4/24P

DS-7732NXI-I4/16P/4S

DS-7732NXI-I4/16P/S

DS-7732NXI-I4/S

DS-9008HQHI-SH

DS-9008HUI-K8

DS-9008HWI-ST

DS-9016HQHI-SH

DS-9016HUHI-F8/N

DS-9016HUI-K8

DS-9016HWI-ST

DS-9032HUI-K8

DS-96064NI-I16

DS-96128NI-I24/H

DS-9616NI-I8

DS-96256NI-I24/H

DS-9632NI-I8

DS-9632NI-ST

DS-9664NI-I8

DS-D60C-B

DS-HD1

DS-K1T105M

DS-K1T105M-C

DS-K1T341BMWI-T

DS-K1T342DWX

DS-K1T500S

DS-K1T606M

DS-K1T671M

DS-K1T671MF

DS-K1T671TM-3XF

DS-K2601

DS-K2602

DS-K2602-G

DS-K2604

DS-K2604-G

DS-KB8112-IM

DS-KB8113-IME1

DS-KC001

DS-KD-BK

DS-KD-DIS

DS-KD-KK

DS-KD-KP

DS-KD-M

DS-KD8003-IME1

DS-KD8003-IME1/Flush

DS-KD8003-IME1/Surface

DS-KD8003-IME2

DS-KH6320-WTE1

DS-KH6320-WTE2

DS-KH8300-T

DS-KH8301-WT

DS-KH8340-TCE2

DS-KH8350-WTE1

DS-KH9510-WTE1

DS-KIS602

DS-KIS701

DS-KIS702-P

DS-KV8102-IM

DS-KV8113-WME1

DS-KV8213-WME1

DS-KV8413-WME1

DS-MCW405/32G/GPS/WIFI

DS-MDS003/2T/8(O-STD)

DS-PA0103-B

ECI-B12F

ECI-B14F

ECI-B62Z2

ECI-B64Z2

ECI-D12F

ECI-D14F

ECI-D62Z2

ECI-D64Z2

ECI-T22F

ECI-T24F

EKI-K164D412

EKI-K164T412

EKI-K41D44

EKI-K41T44

EKI-K82B86

EKI-K82D46

EKI-K82T46

ERI-Q104-P4

ERI-Q108-P8

ERT-F2042

ERT-F2082

XVR AiD — Sat, 23 Apr 2022 21:13:57 +0000

Here in this post, we are going to give you the complete Hikvision Mobile Setup process. It is given here for users who want to view Hikvision NVR online view from remote areas. The Application is easy to download and install. We have to make our NVR online first. When that is online, we can easily make the mobile setup ready.

To make the Hikvision NVR online, the first step is that plugin the NVR and connect it with a network. It will be easily connected to a router through an ethernet cable or Wi-Fi. When it is connected, we go through the following step by step process to make it online.

Load More : Password Reset for Hilook Hikvision NVR/DVR/IPCAM NEW

We go to the monitor screen to which the NVR is connected and right-click the mouse. The following screen appears.

It has many functions. We opt for the function to reach the main menu.

Here, we will log in to the app. Without it, we will not reach the main menu. You will use the same password generated by you while making the NVR setup.

After logging in press the OK system.

After logging in we reach the main menu. The following page appears.

This page opens. Here we will select the “Configuration” icon. We reach the next step.

In this window, we will find the following features.

This page has a “Network” option. Click that option and the following page appears.

When we click the network button, this page shows up. We will go for enabling the DHCP mode.

To enable DHCP, we tick the box. DHCP is the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It facilitates the process of remotely accessing the device.

After ticking the box, press the apply button. After that come back to the main menu.

We will come back to the main menu and select the maintenance option.

We will go here to check the IP of the system.

Under maintenance, we will go to check the IP in the Network option. The image is there to guide you.

You have to note down the IPv4 Address, IPv4 Default Gateway, and the Preferred DNS Server. We will align them to make the NVR online. If we don’t align them, there will be an IP conflict. It will not allow us to online the gadget.

After it comes back to the main menu and selects the Network option.

Open this page and align the IPv4, IP address and the default gateway. Once completed this exercise, press the apply button.

When we apply the button, it reaches us to the next page where we see that the device is under the process and will be online.

It will show that the device is online.

This way we make the NVR online in any network.

For that, we have to open the google play store.

The google play store is an app that is available on Android smartphones. To load it and install it, the first thing you have to do is to search the Hik-connect application on it. Hik-connect is a free Peer to Peer(P2P) service. It is provided by Hikvision.

The basic purpose of this application is that Hikvision devices can easily communicate with one another. We will learn here how the Hik-connect is going to be viewed in iVMS 4500. By default, every remote service of Hikvision is connected with this application.

The first and foremost step is to connect the Hikvision NVR with the network router. You can do it with a wired device or a Wi-fi device. Make the NVR online for monitoring and accessing purposes.

To connect the device and monitor it from any remote location we need to download and install the Hik-connect. Search it and its application iVMS 4500 application will appear on the google play store. You will also get reviews of this item.

This app is smart and intelligent as it easily transmits the best video quality in real-time. There is no time lag. Additionally, it empowers us to use devices from remote areas.

That is why it is very user friendly and empowering. We will show you here the step by step process to set up the device for mobile viewing.

For that, we open the google play store on the google browser. Then enter ‘iVMS 4500’. The following page will appear.

This google play store page will show your search. Now you have to click the ‘install’ button. The installation process will start immediately. It takes only a short while to load the content. When it is finished, the page closes and the app appears on your display screen.

Press open the icon of the app. The following window will open.

Here the app is asking us to select the location. You have to select your zone and the country. For that, you have to click the edit symbol. It will open this page for you.

As is mentioned here. We have selected a zone and the country. It initiates this process to become certain that from where we are accessing this system. Press the enter button for the next step.

Here, the following page will appear.

This page has many functions. Press the option on the upper left-hand side. You will find that it is filled with many options. We will choose our option for the next stage. Click the three lines symbol given on the upper left-hand side.

Open the menu page. It will show you multiple options. You have to know about these functions prior, then only you can select the right option.

As you are seeing the multiple options on the side.

The live view is steering you towards the camera monitoring and viewing. It will show you activities after connecting the gadget. A remote playback option is given. It will guide you in watching the recording.

There is a device option given. It is given for NVR management. Alarms are given to use the Sensor option. It will make your security extra solid. It can sense motion and audio and alert you accordingly. Pictures and videos are the galleries where you can keep the backup of the device.

The configuration option is for making certain arrangements and settings for the device. But first, we will go for the device login.

As we have shown here, it is mentioned that not logged in. We will go for the login. For that, we have to click the login option. It will reflect this window on the screen.

The page has an Id and a password option. Fill in the id and the password. For that, you have to give the NVR id and the password which you had done to make your device operational.

As we have shown here we have mentioned them in their respective places. If you have forgotten the password then you are left with two options.

Either you have to go for the backup process, where it will ask you for certain security functions or you can register all a new. For that, you have to use the Master password suggested by the Hikvision for this version of the NVR.

After that click the button and move on.

After logging in we will go to add the gadget with the application. The new page will show on the upper right-hand side a “+” icon. It is a symbol for adding the device. Click it to add.

Here, the option is saying multiple ways to add the device. We will know them cursorily and follow the “Scan the QR Code” option, which is easier and safer.

The manual Adding option requires filling in the port, the IP address, user Id and the password. The Configuration option is especially for Wi-Fi purposes. Here, we will adjust the settings for the software to make the device connected with the app.

The online device option is more encompassing. It has functions where you can add many devices by manually setting the fields for every gadget.

The best and most trusted option is the Scanning of the QR code. We will go for it.

Click the Scan the QR code option. It will open a new window for scanning.

The full form of the QR code is the Quick Response Code. As its name, it is quick to respond. It opens a new window for the users. Where the client has to connect the scan of the NVR with it.

When we click the option, this page opens for the software. It is asking us to connect the gadget to make it remotely accessed. The moment we align it with the QR Code of the NVR, it reads it automatically and sends us a signal.

There is hardly any time lapse between scanning and capturing. It is done very smoothly. Press the next option now.

The application will reflect a page that will have the details of the device. It will show you the device name, the domain name, port, user id and password. If it is not showing the id and the password, then you have to manually insert them.

You can add multiple devices to the app by using the same method.

This way the gadget is added and we do our monitoring. When the device is added, the cameras attached with that NVR appear on the mobile display screen.

You can add more than 20 devices with the app at a time. It will show you a list, where all the NVRs are mentioned. Whichever you have to view, click them to monitor on the screen.

We have given here the full illustration to guide you with the Hikvision Mobile setup. It can be accessed from any location and we can operate the NVR from our location. It makes our vigilance more powerful.

We can take snaps, record activities, see playbacks, transfer the data, etc. The remote access also saves users’ time as they are in command of the site. We have tried to give you the best possible explanation and solution for the mobile setup process.

Every step is laced with images. These images function as a guide for users. If you have any queries regarding the Hikvision mobile setup process, please let us know. We would love to give you the best possible solutions to your queries.

XVR AiD — Sat, 12 Feb 2022 21:28:25 +0000

The article will introduce how to connect the system to the mobile phone hilook . If you have a concern about the instruction, please submit a request here to the technical support for more details.

Please check the network status of the system. If the users want to view the cameras remotely, the status must be online. It could be checked on the Configuration–>Network–>Sannce Home–>Status:

If the network status is offline, here is the way to fix:
https://support.sannce.com/hc/en-us/articles/900000545803
Please download the APP Sannce Home from Google Play or APP Store.
Please register the APP by using an email address or a phone number.
- Firstly, please select the country and region for the APP account. It should be in accordance with the region where you plan to install the system.
- Secondly, please click Login button. If you don’t have an account, please register the APP with an email address or a phone number. Besides, users need to agree on the privacy policy of the APP.
- Thirdly, please input the email address/phone number to get the security code.
- Fourthly, please set up a password for the APP account to finish the APP registration.
After the APP registration, please follow the below steps to add the system to the app. Here are 2 methods to add the system.

A: Adding by QR code

- Click the ‘+’ icon at the beginning:
- Scan the QR code of the device. The QR code could be found in the Sannce Home section.

B: Adding by Serial Number.

1. - Click the Manual Adding and input the Serial No.
  - Add the device to the APP if the scan is successful.
  - Click Finish to complete the device adding.
  - The users could create a name for the device, or they could skip it.
2. Finally, the cameras could be viewed on the APP.
3. If the app asks for a verification code, here is the way to find it.

Please go to Platform Access, click ‘Enable’ and create a “verification code” by yourself. Please note the verification code must be set up, otherwise, the network status of the NVR can’t be online.

When the Status is ‘Online‘, this system can be accessed remotely via the APP.

Tips:

1. If you don’t want to enter the verification code each time when remote view the camera, please uncheck stream encryption.

2. The special characters are not allowed when setting up the verification code.

XVR AiD — Sat, 12 Feb 2022 17:42:02 +0000

Guide SADP tool Hikvision password reset How to reset hikvision dvr password, admin account locked, how to retrieve hikvision dvr password Get your Region Support Email ID: https://www.hikvision.com/europe/abou…

PTZ

Slow

Çq~ j cCJ

I Preset 1

Preset 2

Preset 3

Preset 4

Preset 5

Preset 6

Preset 7

Preset 8

Preset 9

Preset 10

Preset 11

Preset 12

\* \* \* \*

\* \*

\* \* \* \* \*

Figure 2-3 PTZ Settings

Click .

Set the PTZ camera parameters.

Cl] Note

All parameters should be the same as the PTZ camera.

Click OK.

XVR AiD — Sat, 12 Feb 2022 17:28:32 +0000

How to Reset Hikvision Device Password via Hik-Proconnect

How to Reset Password of NVR DVR via Hik-Connect App

How to reset the password in mail

How to Reset Password on SADP Tool:
Please follow the link
https://www.hikvision.com/en/support/tools/destop-tools/sadp-for-windows/

todownload the latest version of SADP on your computer.
NOTE: The Hikvision device and the computer which installed SADP should be in
the same subnet

How to Reset Password by Answering Validation Questions on Web
type:DS-7216HUHI-F2 / N
Firmware:V3.4.80 build 161028
Preparation:
This method is available for –E/-K/-I series NVR of V3.4.90 or above and Turbo 3.0 DVR
(DS-HG/HQ/HUHI-F series) of V3.4.80 or above. With this strategy, customers could be able to
reset device password by themselves.
Make sure that the device and the computer are in the same subnet or the device has been port
forwarded successfully. Then input the IP address : port to login.
Step1: When using the device for the first time, users need to activate the device through a
compulsory password setting procedure. And the device would show the password intensity
according to the combination of number.
Step2: We strongly recommend you to set a STRONG password.
After setting password, it would pop up the security question configuration. User should set
validation questions in advance.
When forgot password, users could reset password by answering the pre-set questions
Step4: If the device has been activated, please go to Configuration-User management to set
validation questions.

How to Reset Password Using the GUID File on Web

Step1: When using the device for the first time, users need to activate the device through a
compulsory password setting procedure.

And the device would show the password intensity
according to the combination of number.

Step2: We strongly recommend you to set a STRONG password.
Step3: Then export the GUID file.

Next time when there is a need to reset password, please
import the GUID file.

Notice that if the admin password was changed or GUID file has been used,
the GUID file would be invalid.

Step4: If the device has been activated, please go to Configuration-User management to export
the GUID file.

Input the old password before exporting the GUID file.

Notice that if the admin password was changed or the GUID file has been used, the GUID file
would be invalid.

Step5: When you forgot your device password, enter new password resetting interface by clicking
Forget password.

Step6 : Select the GUID Verification Mode. Find the exported GUID file, then import it to reset
device password.

Step7 : We strongly recommend you to set a STRONG password.

Step8: After resetting new password, please remember to export the new GUID file for resetting
password next time